€¦ · contents iii contents about this manual xv related documentation xvi conventions xvii...

170 West Tasman DriveSan Jose, CA 95134-1706USAhttp://www.cisco.com

Cisco Systems, Inc.Corporate Headquarters

Tel:800 553-NETS (6387)

Fax:

408 526-4000

408 526-4100

Cisco 700 Series Router Command Reference

Software Release 4.4 July 19, 1999

Customer Order Number: DOC-78-2413-09=Text Part Number: 78-24139-09

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense.

You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:

• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.

• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.

• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.

• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)

Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Access Registrar, AccessPath, Any to Any, AtmDirector, CCDA, CCDE, CCDP, CCIE, CCNA, CCNP, CCSI, CD-PAC, the Cisco logo, Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, CiscoLink, the Cisco Management Connection logo, the Cisco NetWorks logo, the Cisco Powered Network logo, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems Capital logo, Cisco Systems Networking Academy, the Cisco Technologies logo, ConnectWay, ControlStream, Fast Step, FireRunner, GigaStack, IGX, JumpStart, Kernel Proxy, MGX, Natural Network Viewer, NetSonar, Network Registrar, New World, Packet, PIX, Point and Click Internetworking, Policy Builder, Precept, RouteStream, Secure Script, ServiceWay, SlideCast, SMARTnet, StreamView, The Cell, TrafficDirector, TransPath, ViewRunner, VirtualStream, VisionWay, VlanDirector, Workgroup Director, and Workgroup Stack are trademarks; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, Empowering the Internet Generation, The Internet Economy, and The New Internet Economy are service marks; and Asist, BPX, Catalyst, Cisco, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Systems, the Cisco Systems logo, the Cisco Systems Cisco Press logo, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherSwitch, FastHub, FastLink, FastPAD, FastSwitch, IOS, IP/TV, IPX, LightStream, LightSwitch, MICA, NetRanger, Registrar, StrataView Plus, Stratm, TeleRouter, and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the U.S. and certain other countries. All other trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any of its resellers. (9906R)

C O N T E N T S

About This Manual xv

Related Documentation xvi

Conventions xvii

Chapter 1 Overview 1-1

Supported Protocols 1-1

Software Images 1-2

Administrative Configuration Options 1-3

Command Levels 1-3

Chapter 2 System Management Commands 2-1

cd 2-2

help 2-3

log 2-5

ping 2-9

reboot 2-11

reset packets 2-12

set baudrate 2-13

set callduration 2-15

set calltime 2-16

set compression 2-18

set date 2-19

set default 2-20

set echo 2-22

set ipx trace 2-23

set loopback 2-24

Contents iii

set screenlength 2-26

set serialport 2-27

set systemname 2-30

set time 2-32

set tpad parity 2-33

show 2-35

show callduration 2-37

show calltime 2-38

show configuration 2-39

show connection 2-41

show demand 2-42

show memstat 2-43

show packets 2-45

show tpad 2-47

show users 2-48

swl 2-49

test 2-55

upload 2-57

version 2-59

Chapter 3 Profile Commands 3-1

reset user 3-2

set active 3-4

set inactive 3-6

set profile 3-8

set profile id 3-10

Cisco 700 Series Router Command Referenceiv

set user 3-11

show profile 3-13

unset 3-14

Chapter 4 Security Commands 4-1

login 4-2

logout 4-4

reset calleridreceive 4-5

set callerid 4-6

set clicallback 4-7

set callidreceive 4-9

set local access 4-10

set logout 4-13

set password 4-14

set remote access 4-17

show security 4-20

Chapter 5 ISDN Calling Commands 5-1

Configuring Directory Numbers 5-1SPIDs and Directory Numbers 5-1Analog Telephone Ports 5-2

Data Over Voice Bearer Service 5-3

Automatic Data Call Disconnect 5-4Distinctive Ringing 5-5

call 5-6

demand 5-8

disconnect 5-10

establish 5-12

Contents v

release 5-14

reset directory number 5-16

reset phone 5-18

set aoctimeout 5-19

set alawvoice 5-21

set auto 5-22

set autodetection 5-24

set backupnumber 5-27

set button (Cisco 770 series routers) 5-28

set callwaiting 5-30

set conference 5-31

set countrygroup 5-32

set delay 5-34

set directorynumber 5-36

set internaltones 5-38

set multidestination 5-39

set number 5-40

set permanent 5-42

set phone 5-44

set plan 5-46

set ringback 5-48

set speed 5-50

set spid 5-52

set switch 5-54

set timeout 5-56

Cisco 700 Series Router Command Referencevi

set transfer 5-58

set voicepriority 5-59

show status 5-62

show voicerouting 5-63

timeout 5-64

unset permanent 5-66

Chapter 6 IP Commands 6-1

reset dhcp address 6-2

reset ip filter 6-4

reset ip route 6-5

reset ip pat porthandler 6-6

set dhcp 6-7

set dhcp address 6-10

set dhcp dns 6-12

set dhcp domain 6-14

set dhcp gateway 6-15

set dhcp leasetime 6-17

set dhcp netbiosscope 6-19

set dhcp netmask 6-20

set dhcp wins 6-22

set gateway 6-24

set ip address 6-25

set ip cost 6-26

set ip filter 6-27

set ip framing 6-32

Contents vii

set ip multicast 6-33

set netbios name spoofing 6-34

set ip netmask 6-36

set ip pat 6-37

set ip pat porthandler 6-38

set ip pat tcptimeout 6-41

set ip pat udptimeout 6-42

set ip propagate 6-43

set ip rip receive 6-44

set ip rip snapshot client 6-45

set ip rip snapshot server 6-48

set ip rip summarization 6-50

set ip rip time 6-51

set ip rip update 6-52

set ip rip version 6-55

set ip route 6-56

set ip routing 6-58

set subnet 6-59

show dhcp config 6-60

show ip configuration 6-63

show ip filter 6-66

show ip pat 6-68

show ip rip snapshot 6-69

show ip rip time 6-71

Cisco 700 Series Router Command Referenceviii

show ip route 6-72

show netbios name 6-74

Chapter 7 Novell IPX Commands 7-1

ipxping 7-2

reset ipx fIlter 7-4

reset ipx gateway 7-5

reset ipx route 7-6

reset ipx sap helper 7-7

reset ipx service 7-8

set ipx filter 7-10

set ipx framing 7-12

set ipx gateway 7-14

set ipx netbios 7-15

set ipx networkaddress 7-16

set ipx rip receive 7-17

set ipx rip snapshot client 7-18

set ipx rip snapshot server 7-20

set ipx rip update 7-22

set ipx route 7-24

set ipx routing 7-26

set ipx sap helper 7-27

set ipx service 7-29

set ipx spoofing 7-31

show ipx config 7-33

show ipx connections 7-35

Contents ix

show ipx demand 7-37

show ipx filter 7-38

show ipx rip snapshot 7-39

show ipx route 7-41

show ipx service 7-43

show ipx statistics 7-45

Chapter 8 Transparent Bridging Commands 8-1

reset address 8-2

reset filter 8-3

reset pattern 8-5

reset type 8-6

set address 8-7

set age 8-9

set bridging 8-10

set filter 8-11

set learn 8-13

set mode 8-14

set passthru 8-16

set pattern 8-17

set type 8-20

set unicastfilter 8-22

show address 8-23

show ethernet 8-25

show filter 8-26

Cisco 700 Series Router Command Referencex

show pattern 8-27

show type 8-29

Chapter 9 PPP Commands 9-1

CHAP Authentication 9-1

PAP Authentication 9-2

set ppp address negotiation local 9-3

set ppp authentication 9-5

set ppp authentication accept 9-8

set ppp bacp 9-10

set ppp callback 9-14

ppp chapallow multihost 9-16

set ppp chaprefuse 9-17

set ppp clientname 9-19

set ppp magicnumbercheck 9-21

set ppp multilink 9-23

set ppp negotiation count 9-25

set ppp negotiation integrity 9-26

set ppp negotiation retry 9-28

set ppp ip netmask local 9-29

set ppp password 9-31

set ppp tas 9-33

set ppp tas chapsecret local 9-35

set ppp tas client 9-36

set ppp termreq count 9-38

show negotiation 9-39

Contents xi

Chapter 10 SNMP Commands 10-1

reset snmp traphost 10-2

set snmp contact 10-3

set snmp location 10-5

set snmp trap 10-7

set snmp traphost 10-10

show snmp 10-11

Chapter 11 DTMF Commands 11-1

set dtmf call transfer 11-2

set dtmf call conference 11-3

set dtmf cancel call waiting 11-4

set dtmf directory number 11-5

set dtmf disable dial terminator 11-7

set dtmf gateway 11-8

set dtmf ip address 11-9

set dtmf ip netmask 11-10

set dtmf number 11-11

set dtmf spid 11-12

set dtmf switch (North American Models Only) 11-14

Chapter 12 Remote CAPI Commands 13-1

CAPI Features 13-2

CAPI and RVS-COM 13-2Supported B Channel Protocols 13-3Supported D-Channel Protocols 13-4Supported Applications 13-4Remote CAPI Router Commands 13-4

Cisco 700 Series Router Command Referencexii

diag rcapi 13-5

reset rcapi number 13-7

set rcapi 13-8

set rcapi number 13-9

set rcapi server port 13-11

show rcapi status 13-12

Chapter 13 X.25 Commands 12-1

Virtual Circuits 12-1D-Channel Packet Service 12-2Local Communications 12-3TP Communications Processing 12-4WAN Communications 12-5Statistics 12-5

reset x25d policy 12-7

set aodi 12-8

set x25 12-11

set x25d 12-13

set x25d policy 12-15

set x25d priorityqueue 12-17

set x25d tei 12-19

set x25d priorityqueue lsvc limit 12-21

set x25d x121host 12-22

show aodi 12-24

show x25 12-25

show x25d policy 12-26

show x25d priorityqueue 12-27

Contents xiii

show x25d statistics 12-29

show x25d tei 12-30

show X25d X121host 12-31

Appendix A Ethernet Packet Types B-1

Appendix B Port Assignments and NetBIOS Names C-1

TCP Port Assignments C-1

UDP Port Assignments C-2

NetBios Names C-4

Cisco 700 Series Router Command Referencexiv

About This Manual
the
ng to

.

ter

e

-Point

tem

This chapter discusses the organization, related documentation, and conventions of Cisco 700 Series Router Command Reference.

This document is organized as follows:

• Chapter 1, “Overview,” provides a brief overview of Cisco IOS-700 software and supported protocols.

• Chapter 2, “System Management Commands,” describes the commands pertainisystem interfaces, system booting, and terminal sessions.

• Chapter 3, “Profile Commands,” describes the commands used to control profiles

• Chapter 4, “Security Commands,” describes the commands used to configure rousecurity.

• Chapter 5, “ISDN Calling Commands,” describes the commands used to configurIntegrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) calling.

• Chapter 6, “IP Commands,” describes the commands used to configure Internet Protocol (IP) routing.

• Chapter 7, “Novell IPX Commands,” describes the commands used to configure Internet Packet Exchange (IPX) routing.

• Chapter 8, “Transparent Bridging Commands,” describes the commands used to configure transparent bridging.

• Chapter 9, “PPP Commands,” describes the commands used to configure Point-toProtocol (PPP) parameters.

• Chapter 10, “SNMP Commands,” describes the commands used to configure SysNetwork Management Protocol (SNMP) parameters.

About This Manual xv

Related Documentation

)

ure

5

n ach

e

n

is

at the n the tact

• Chapter 11, “DTMF Commands,” describes the Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMFcommands used to configure a basic telephone service interface.

• Chapter 12, “Remote CAPI Commands,” describes the commands used to configRemote CAPI.

• Chapter 13, “X.25 Commands,” describes the commands used to manage the X.2protocol.

• Appendix A, “Ethernet Packet Types,” describes the Ethernet packet types.

• Appendix B, “Port Assignments and NetBIOS Names,” describes the TransmissioControl Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port assignment for eport, and the NetBIOS names for Windows NT.

Related DocumentationThe following documentation is also provided with your Cisco 700 series router:

• Release Notes for Cisco 700 Series Router Software provides the latest information onthe router software. Release notes for previous versions of the software are on thCisco Documentation CD-ROM and the Cisco Web site.

• Cisco 760 Quick Reference Guide and Cisco 770 Quick Reference Guide provide hardware installation instructions and forms to assist you in gathering configuratioinformation. Each guide includes a Cisco 700 Fast Step CD-ROM.

• Cisco 700 Series Router Configuration Guide provides instructions for setting up andconfiguring the Cisco 700 series router.

• Cisco 700 Series Router Installation Guide provides instructions for cabling the Cisco 700 series router. The document is available on the Cisco Documentation CD-ROM and the Cisco Web site in HTML format. A paper copy of the document provided with your router.

Additional Cisco documentation and literature are available in a CD-ROM package thships with your Cisco 700 series router. The Documentation CD-ROM, a member of Cisco Connection family, is updated monthly. Therefore, it may be more up to date thaprinted documentation. To order additional copies of the Documentation CD-ROM, con

Cisco700 Series Router Command Referencexvi

Conventions

bmit

.

n:

own not

efore, the

your local sales representative or call customer service. You can also access Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at http://www.cisco.com, http://www-china.cisco.com, or http://www-europe.cisco.com.

Cisco 700 series router configuration information can be found at http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/779/smbiz/service/configs/700_configs.htm and http://www.cisco.com/warp/cpropub/67/sample.html

If you are reading Cisco product documentation on the World Wide Web, you can sucomments electronically. Click Feedback in the toolbar, and select Documentation. After you complete the form, click Submit to send it to Cisco. We appreciate your comments

ConventionsThis publication uses the following conventions to convey instructions and informatio

• The caret character (^) represents the Control key.

For example, the key combinations ^D and Ctrl-D are equivalent: Both mean hold dthe Control key while you press the D key. Keys are indicated in capitals, but are case sensitive.

• A string is defined as a nonquoted set of characters.

There are a few strings that include quotation marks as part of the statement. Thercommon practice is not to include the quotation marks unless they are included instatement. For example, set the SNMP community string to public does not use quotation marks around the string “public” because when you enter the string, youwould not include the quotation marks.

Command descriptions use these conventions:

• Vertical bars ( | ) separate alternative, mutually exclusive, elements.

• Square brackets ([ ]) indicate optional elements.

• Variables for which you supply values are in italic.

About This Manual xvii

Conventions

user mand n is

ot

rcase er the hown nimum

pe are orms

pt

ials

• Examples that contain system prompts denote interactive sessions, indicating theenters the command at the prompt. The system prompt indicates the current commode. For example, the prompt router:2503> indicates profile mode. The exceptiowhen a list of commands is provided in an example configuration; the prompt is nshown for the sake of clarity.

• Fixed information you enter is in boldface screen font. Variable information you enter is in italic.

• Terminal sessions and information the system displays are in screen font.

• Nonprinting characters, such as passwords, are in angle brackets (< >).

The command syntax contains a combination of bold and regular uppercase and lowealphanumeric characters. You can enter the full text of the commands, or you can entabbreviated form. The abbreviated form consists of the first characters in each word, sin uppercase bold in the command syntax. The uppercase bold characters are the miyou must enter for the command to be recognized and executed.

The actual commands you enter are not case sensitive. The capitalization and bold tyused in this manual only to differentiate the characters required for the abbreviated fof commands.

For example, The syntax of the set system command is as follows:

SEt SYstemname [systemname]

The complete version of the set system command can be entered at the command promas follows:

>set systemname systemnamesystemname >

The abbreviated version of the same command can be entered as follows:

>se sy systemnamesystemname >

Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to maternot contained in this manual.

Cisco700 Series Router Command Referencexviii

Conventions

Timesaver This symbol means the described action saves time. You can save time by performing the action described in the paragraph.

Caution This symbol means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.

Figure 1 explains the fields of a typical command reference page.

12

6

9 3

About This Manual xix

Conventions

Figure 1 Typical Command Reference Page Fields

Cisco700 Series Router Command Referencexx

C H A P T E R

Overview

1

Overview
ough
s

Cisco 700 series routers connect small office Ethernet LANs to corporate networks thrIntegrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines. After configuration, the router automatically routes packets to and from remote destinationusing IP or Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX).

The Cisco 700 series router is a fixed configuration router. The router operating system iscalled Cisco IOS-700 software and is unique to the Cisco 700 series router.

Supported ProtocolsThe Cisco 700 series routers support the following protocols:

• IP

• IPX

• Internet Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP)

• Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)

• Internetwork Packet Exchange Control Protocol (IPXCP)

• Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)

• Bridge Control Protocol (BCP)

• Multilink PPP (MLPPP)

• Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

• Service Advertisement Protocol (SAP)

• Password Authentication Protocol (PAP)

1-1

Software Images

are) ies, The s. The

a

• Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP server)

• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

• Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IP and IPX

• Triggered RIP for IP

• Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP)

• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

• Port and Address Translation (PAT)

• Remote Common Application Programmers Interface (RCAPI)

• ISDN Device Control Protocol (ISDN-DCP)

Software ImagesThe Cisco 700 Series routers run a proprietary Cisco software (Cisco IOS-700 softwimage, which is different than traditional Cisco IOS software. The image you use vardepending on the region in which the router is used and what feature set you desire.image name, for example, c760-in.r-TPH.43-1.bin, designates the region and featureregions are as follows:

• US for use in North America

• NET3 for use in Europe

• TR6 for use in Germany

• INS for use in Japan

• TPH for use in Australia

The features are indicated as follows:

• Internet Ready (IP only, 30 users with data compression on) images have a "b" designation.

• Internet Ready X.25 (IP only, four LAN devices, compression, X.25) images have"bxd" designation.

Cisco700 Series Router Command Reference1-2

Administrative Configuration Options

an

700

760) re set:

g

red. lobal

te to a

• Remote Office (IP/IPX, 1500 LAN devices, compression) images have an "r" designation.

• Remote Office X.25 (IP/IPX, 1500 LAN devices, compression, X.25) images have"rxd" designation.

So the example image named "c760-in.b-TPH.43-1.bin" is a Series 760 router imagesoftware Release 4.3(1), with the Internet Ready feature set for Australia. (All Ciscoseries routers run Series 760 router images. There is no Series 770 router images.)

You can verify the image loaded on your router by entering the version command at the command-line prompt. The following example shows a router running a Cisco 760 (cimage for the United States (US), release 4.0(1), and using the Remote Office (r) featu

guest> versionSoftware Version c760-in.r.US 4.0(1) - Jan 14 1997 19:00:23Cisco 766ISDN Stack Revision US 2.10 (5ESS/DMS/NI-1)

Administrative Configuration OptionsYou can configure routers through the configuration port or across an IP network usinTelnet. In addition, Cisco IOS-700 software supports Cisco 700 Fast Step software applications. These tools are on the Cisco 700 Fast Step CD-ROM in the Cisco 700 Quick Reference Guide.

Command LevelsCommands and parameters have different results depending on where they are enteThere are two primary levels, system and profile. The system mode commands are gin nature. The profile mode commands are groups of command parameters that relaspecific switch or port. For additional information regarding profiles, refer to the Cisco 700 Series Router Configuration Guide.

Overview 1-3

Command Levels


C H A P T E R

System Management Command

2

System Management Commands

rminal forms ter, ion minal

This chapter describes the commands for system interfaces, system booting, and tesessions. The system interface commands display the router configuration in various using the show commands. The system booting commands are used to reboot the roudownload software, and reset configuration value to their defaults. The terminal sesscommands manage communications between an ASCII terminal or a PC running teremulation software and the router. (The Cisco 700 Series Installation Guide provides instructions for connecting a terminal to the router.)

s 2-1

cd

ified the

name s are

a

cdTo create a profile, enter an existing profile, or return to system mode, use the cd command (also known as the change user command).

CD [username]

Syntax Description

Command ModeSystem or profile mode

Usage GuidelinesThis command creates a profile if the user name does not exist or moves to the specprofile if the user name does exist. From within a profile, this command returns from profile to system mode.

The user name displays in the prompt, following the router name.

The user name can be abbreviated to the fewest number of characters that make theunique. The minimum is two characters. The maximum is 64 characters. User namenot case-sensitive. If no user name is specified, you return to system mode.

For authentication purposes, the user name is the string the remote device uses as ausername when authenticating itself through Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

ExampleThe following example moves from system mode (where the router name is Host) toprofile named 2503:

Host> cd 2503Host:2503>

username Profile name.


help

r a d

helpTo display a list of commands and the syntax for each command, use the help command.

HE lp [cmd [modifier]]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesUse this command to display online help information about commands. You can entequestion mark (?) in place of the word “help.” Used without parameters, the commandisplays all the commands.

cmd All commands for the specified group are listed. The most useful are set commands, reset commands, show commands, log commands, test commands, and unset commands.

modifier All modifiers for the specified command are listed. The most useful are ip (Internet Protocol), ipx (Internetwork Packet Exchange), and snmp (Simple Network Management Protocol).

System Management Commands 2-3

help

ExampleThe following example displays help for the call command:

Host> help callCAll [ C# | L# | # | C#/L# | C#/# | #/# ] [ P# | CH# | P#/CH# ] [<number>]where C# indicates a Connection number # or L# indicates a Link number C#/L# or #/# indicates Link of a Connection P# indicates Port CH# indicates Channel P#/CH# indicates Channel of a Port<Q> and <enter> to Quit or <enter> for MORE


log

s

ets ed.

n

logTo implement the logging functions, use the log command.

LOg NOne | CA lls | MEssage | ERrors | IPx [TI me] [VErbose]

LOg [LAN | connection] PAckets | TRaffic [CHannel = channel] [VErbose [INbound | OUtbound]]

Syntax Description

NOne Disable all logging.

CAlls Log call statistics. Each major call event is logged, and a message displays every time a channel is assigned a connection.

MEssage Display a message when a channel is assigned a connection.

ERrors Log error messages that otherwise are not displayed, including bufferallocation errors, mail delivery errors, and chip-level errors.

IPx Display messages when Service Advertisement Protocol (SAP) entrieget changed, interface characteristics are set or changed, or when erroneous Routing Information Protocol (RIP) information is received.

TI me Display time and date of each logged event or message.

VErbose Log all layers of the ISDN call control stack and traffic by printing the entire packet.

LAN Enable logging for the LAN connection. Used with packets or traffic .

PAckets Display statistics on packet routing once per second. Number of packfiltered, forwarded, received, and the packet queue lengths are display

TRaffic Display a one-character indicator of each packet sent on the connectioor the whole packet when verbose is specified.


log

e

nel

DefaultLog calls


Usage GuidelinesThe log command displays all enabled logged entries. More than one keyword can bentered at a time.

ExamplesThe following example shows output from the log calls command:

Host> log calls timecb760> ca 1 654504/04/1996 00:24:08 L05 0 6545 Outgoing Call Initiatedcb760> cb760> 01/01/1995 00:24:10 L04 0 Line Deactivatedcb760> 01/01/1995 00:24:10 L27 0 Disconnectedcb760>

CHannel Provide the channel number (logs traffic on a channel before the chanis assigned to a connection). This is primarily used to diagnose Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) negotiation problems.

INbound OUtbound

In conjunction with verbose, restrict the packet content display to either incoming or outgoing packets.


log

The following example shows output from the log messages command:

Host> log messages> Host> 04/04/1996 04:19:26 L05 0 814159031604 Outgoing Call InitiatedHost> 0500 --> 0400 0001

01 00 02 80 13 1d 18 02 00 03 2c0c 38 31 34 31 35 39 30 33 3136 30 35 6c 09 00 00 37 37 3432 38 36 35 04 02 88 90

Host> 04/04/1996 04:19:26 L05 0 814159031605 Outgoing Call InitiatedHost 0400 --> 0300 01 8012 0340 b548

08 01 00 80 04 02 88 90 18 01 832c 0c 38 31 34 31 35 39 30 3331 36 30 34 6c 09 00 80 37 3734 32 38 36 35

Host> 0400 --> 0300 02 8013 0340 b54808 01 00 80 04 02 88 90 18 01 832c 0c 38 31 34 31 35 39 30 3331 36 30 35 6c 09 00 80 37 3734 32 38 36 35

Host> 0300 --> 0400 02 8013 0341 b3f602 01 14 98 18 01 89

The following example shows output from the log messages verbose command:

Host> log messages verboseHost> 0300 --> 020a 02 8015 0240 b3f6

08 01 16 0fHost> 0400 --> 0500 0004

04 00 02 80 15 04 18 02 01 01Host> 020a --> 0200 02 0000 0140 b3f6

00 93 fa 2e08 01 16 0f

Host> 0200 --> 020a 00 0000 0141 b3f602 81 0c e008 01 95 07

Host> 04/04/19956 04:22:48 L08 2 814159031605 Call ConnectedHost> 020a --> 0300 01 0000 0241 b3f6

02 81 0c e008 01 95 07

Host> 020a --> 0200 01 0000 0140 b0c602 81 01 0e


log

The following example shows output from the log errors command:

2865_66> log errors2865_66> Log Errors: 11003 IPX RIP Not Sent To Virtual Conn 32865_66> Log Errors: 11003 IPX RIP Not Sent To Virtual Conn 32865_66> Log Errors: 11003 IPX RIP Not Sent To Virtual Conn 32865_66> Log Errors: 11003 IPX RIP Not Sent To Virtual Conn 32865_66> Log Errors: 11003 IPX RIP Not Sent To Virtual Conn 32865_66>


ping

m d and d.

pingTo determine whether a system can be reached on any connected interface, use theping command.

PIng ipaddress

Syntax Description

Default None


Usage GuidelinesThe router generates a ping packet that includes the source address of the profile frowhich it was sent. If the destination can be reached, the round-trip delay is determinereported. If the destination cannot be reached, a “no response” message is generate

The ping command automatically tries three times to reach the destination.

ExampleThe following example illustrates a successful ping:

Host> ping 172.16.2.1start sending : round trip time is 40 msec.start sending : round trip time is 40 msec.start sending : round trip time is 40 msec.

ipaddress IP address of the target system.


ping

The following example illustrates an unsuccessful ping:

Host> ping 172.16.2.1start sending : no responsestart sending : no responsestart sending : no response


reboot

rebootTo boot the router manually, use the reboot command.

REBoot

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example shows a manual reboot:

Host> rebootBoot version 2.1(1) 08/13/97 17:33Copyright (c) 1993-1997. All rights reserved.POST ............ OK (1.5MB).Validating FLASH ... OK.Booting up ............................01/01/1995 00:00:00 Connection 1 Openedtomd> 01/01/1995 00:00:00 L01 0 Started Operationtomd> 01/01/1995 00:00:01 Connection 2 Opened

Related Commandsset baudrateset default


reset packets

reset packetsTo set accumulated packet counts to zero for one connection, use the reset packets command.

REset [connection | LAN ] PACkets [AL l]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone

Command ModeProfile mode

ExampleThe following example resets the packet counts for profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset packets

Related Commandshow packets

connection Reset accumulated packet counts to zero on the specified connection. If neither a connection number nor LAN is specified, packet counts for the connection associated with the current profile are reset.

LAN Reset accumulated packet counts to zero on the LAN connection.

AL l Reset all accumulated packets.


set baudrate

set baudrateTo configure the baud rate for the console port, use the set baudrate command.

SEt BAudrate 300 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400

Syntax Description

Default9600 baud

Command ModeSystem mode

ExampleThe following example configures the console port for 2400 baud:

Host> set baudrate 2400

300 Configure the console port for 300 baud.








set baudrate

Related Commandreboot


set callduration

ion

set calldurationTo place a limit on the length of time a data call is up, use the set callduration command.

SEt CALLD uration minutes

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe set callduration command is allowed only after system-level password authenticatis complete.

This command does not affect voice calls.

ExampleThe following example sets the duration of a data call to 10 minutes:

Host> set callduration 10

Related Commandsset calltimeset passwordshow callduration

minutes Maximum duration of a call in minutes. Enter any value between 1 and 1430. A value of 0 turns off any configured limit on data call duration.


set calltime

er

er

set calltimeTo set the time of day when calls can be made or accepted, use the set calltime command.

SEt CALLT ime [VO ice | DAta] IN coming | OUTgoing [starttime | endtime]SEt CALLT ime [VO ice | DAta] IN coming | OUTgoing OFf]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


VO ice Time-of-day parameters affect voice calls only.

DA ta Time-of-day parameters affect data calls only.

INcoming Time-of-day parameters affect incoming calls only.

OUTgoing Time-of-day parameters affect outgoing calls only.

starttime Starting time of day when calls are allowed. The router uses a 24-hour clock, and the parameter is entered HH:MM format, where HH is a numbfrom 0 to 23, and MM is a two-digit number from 00 to 59.

endtime Ending time of day when calls are no longer allowed. Enter the parametin HH:MM format, where HH is a number from 0 to 23, and MM is a two-digit number from 00 to 59.

OFf Turn off any configured time-of-day limits on calls.


set calltime

d

attery, time.

Usage GuidelinesThe system time on the router must be set correctly for this feature to be accurate aneffective. System-level password authentication is required before the set calltime command is allowed. The router does not have an auxiliary power supply, such as a bto maintain the router clock. If you power-cycle the router, reenter the system date and

ExampleThe following example allows incoming voice calls from 8:00 am to 4:00 pm:

Host> set calltime voice incoming 08:00 16:00

Related Commandsset calldurationset dateset passwordset sntp serverset timeshow calldurationshow calltime


set compression

set compression To enable or disable data compression, use the set compression command.

SEt COmpression STac | OFf

Syntax Description

Default STac (enabled)


Usage GuidelinesTurn compression off if you are using High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) protocol.

ExampleThe following example disables compression for the profile 2503 connection:

Host:2503> set compression off

STac Enable data compression.

OFf Disable data compression.


set date

ging.

set dateTo set the current date, use the set date command.

SEt DA te MM/DD/YYYY

Syntax Description

DefaultThe default date is 01/01/1995.


Usage GuidelinesYou must reset the date every time the router is booted. The date appears during log

ExampleThe following example configures the date in the router for August 13, 1999:

Host> set date 08/13/1999

Related Commandset time

MM A two-digit number from 01 to 12.

DD A two-digit number from 01 to 31.

YYYY A four-digit number from 1994 to 2020.


set default

tting r-up

ines

a

g to eries

ver tion

to E,

set defaultTo set all variable parameters to their default values, use the set default command.

SEt DEfault

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe set default command resets all parameters to their default values, deletes the user-defined profiles, sets the Auto_Config flag to FALSE, and reboots the router. Sethe Auto_Config flag to FALSE triggers the auto-configuration procedure in the poweoperation.

The auto-configuration feature allows the router to obtain the configuration file from aremote server by using Bootstrap Protocol(BOOTP). Upon power-up, the router examthe Auto_Config flag stored in nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM). If the Auto_Config flag is FALSE, the router initiates a BOOTP to request an IP address from the server whenconnection is established. (If the flag is TRUE, the BOOTP request is not initiated.)

When the router and BOOTP and TFTP servers at the central site are set up, use pingenerate traffic and trigger the ISDN call. When the call is connected, the Cisco 700 srouter sends a BOOTP request. If the server finds a matching MAC address from BOOTPTAB, the server returns a client profile that includes an IP address and configuration filename. The router initiates a TFTP client request, requesting the serdownload the configuration file. (The U.S. image requires SPID and switch configurainformation before the ISDN connection can be established.)

After successfully loading the configuration file, the router sets the Auto_Config flag TRUE in NVRAM. In a subsequent power-up operation, if the Auto_Config flag is TRUthe router does not initiate BOOTP to request a configuration file from the server.


set default

the PP

This should be done on the LAN side (Ethernet interface) only. If this operation fails,Auto_Config flag remains FALSE. If this is done on the WAN side and there is a WAN/Pconnection established, this process is triggered repeatedly on the WAN link.

ExampleThe following example configures the router to default values:

Host> set default

Related Commandreboot


set echo

set echoTo enable and disable terminal echo of keyboard entries, use the set echo command.

SEt ECho ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOn


ExampleThe following example disables terminal echo for the router:

Host> set echo off

ON Enable terminal echo.

OFf Disable terminal echo.


set ipx trace

set ipx traceTo convert IPX packets to hexadecimal values for troubleshooting purposes, use the set ipx trace command.

SEt IPX TR ace length | OFf | ON

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


ExamplesThe following example enables IPX trace and sets packet length to 4096:

Host> set ipx trace 4096 on

The following example disables IPX trace:

Host> set ipx trace off

length Packet length (from 1 to 65535).

ON Enable IPX packet conversion to hexadecimal numbers.

OFf Disable IPX packet conversion to hexadecimal numbers.


set loopback

line,

r he

is t

set loopbackTo create a loop from the Cisco 700 series router toward the remote router on the ISDNuse the set loopback command.

SEt [connection] LOOpback ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultDisabled


Usage GuidelinesThis command is used with the test command for troubleshooting purposes. In system mode, this command must be used with the connection-number argument. The routedisplays an error message if a connection number is not specified. In profile mode, tcommand uses the connection number for the profile. Use the show connection command to display which profiles have a loopback.

connection A connection number on which to create a loop. If no connection numberspecified, a loop is created on the connection associated with the currenprofile. If the router cannot determine the connection number from the profile, the router displays an error message.

ON Enable a loop.

OFf Disable a loop.


set loopback

ExampleThe following example creates a loopback on connection 1:

Host> set 1 loopback on

Related Commandsshow connectiontest


set screenlength

to

set screenlengthTo set the maximum number of lines to display on the terminal, use the set screenlength command.

SEt SCreenlength lines

Syntax Description

Default20 lines


ExampleThe following example configures the terminal to display 30 lines:

Host> set screenlength 30

Related Commandsset baudrateset serialport

lines Maximum screen length to display on your terminal. The length can be from 2 128 lines.


set serialport

)

inal elnet.

set serialport To toggle the serial port to function as a configuration port or a TPAD (Controller PADport, use the set serialport command.

SEt SErialport TPad | COnfig

Syntax Description

DefaultCOnfig


Usage GuidelinesWhen you enable the serial port as a TPAD, communications from a configuration termto the serial port are not possible. You can enter configuration commands by using T(Refer to the Cisco 700 Series Installation Guide for information on connecting a terminalto the router.)

To switch from TPAD mode to configuration mode, do one of the following:

• From the terminal connected to the serial port, enter ^A three times, followed by aReturn to restore the prompt.

• From a Telnet session, enter the set serial config command.

Attention (AT) commands are entered at the prompt on the TPAD terminal.

TPAD Set the serial port as a TPAD port.

COnfig Set the serial port as a configuration port.


set serialport

nced in he so

to the s

There are two mode of operation in the TPAD implementation that respond to the enhapoint-of-sale system (EPOS), Verbose and Terse. In Verbose mode, the response isstrings, such as “CONNECT,” “NO CARRIER,” “BUSY” and so forth. In Terse mode tresponse is in numbers, such as 1 (CONNECT), 3 (DISCONNECT), 7 (BUSY), and forth.

When the router is in TPAD mode, these responses are echoed to a terminal attachedrouter serial port. Prior to software Release 4.3(1), the mode of operation was alwayverbose with echo on. In software Release 4.3(1), a series of TPAD commands wereimplemented to support RIVA functionality.

Multiple commands can be entered on a single line.

The current state of the serial port can be displayed by using the show configuration command.

ExampleThe following example sets the serial port as a TPAD port:

Host> set serialport tpad

Table 2-1 AT Commands

Command Description

ATV0 Response strings display in Terse mode (as numbers).

ATV1 Response strings display in Verbose mode (as strings). Default.

ATE0 Disable echoing commands.

ATE1 Enable echoing commands (default).

ATP Pulse dial prefix.

ATDT Tone dial prefix.

AT&F Force factory defaults.

ATS7 Set carrier wait time.


set serialport

Related Commandsset tpad parityshow configurationshow tpad


set systemname

PP)

ame is

ervice

PPP rompt.

set systemname To configure the router name as the system prompt and for Point-to-Point Protocol (Pauthentication, use the set systemname command.

SEt SYstemname [systemname]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo system name


Usage GuidelinesThe system name is case sensitive and can be from 1 to 64 characters. If no system nentered, the system name is blanked.

The system name identifies the router when making PPP connections to an Internet sprovider (ISP) if there is no PPP client name in the profile defined with the set ppp clientname command. If a PPP client name is defined in the profile, the router uses theclient name for PPP authentication; the router retains the system name as part of the pTo delete the system name, enter the systemname command without an argument.

ExampleThe following example sets the system name to Host:

> set systemname HostHost>

systemname Name used as the system prompt.


set systemname

Related Commandset ppp clientname


set time

set timeTo set the current time, use the set time command.

SEt TI me HH:MM:SS

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe time must be reset whenever the router is rebooted.

ExampleThe following example configures the current time in the router:

Host> set time 08:48:20

Related Commandset calltime

HH A two-digit number from 00 to 23.

MM A two-digit number from 00 to 59.

SS A two-digit number from 00 to 59.


set tpad parity

r. (In , and

set tpad parityTo select the communications parameters for TPAD, use the set tpad parity command.

SEt TPad PArity EVen | ODd | None

Syntax Description

DefaultNone (8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity)


Usage GuidelinesYou can change parity of TPAD communications in software Release 4.1(2) and highesoftware Release 4.1(1), serial port communication is limited to 8 data bits, 1 stop bitno parity.)

The TPAD protocol requires the following X.25 fixed parameters:

• LAPB (Link Access Procedure, Balanced)

• T1 Timer – 1 second

• N2 Retry Count – 2

• DTE only

EVen 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, and even parity.

ODd 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, and odd parity.

None 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.


set tpad parity

ause

.

NUI) ase 3

• K frame count – 7

• Module 8 only

The X.25 protocol requires the following fixed parameters:

• Packet Size – 128 bytes

• VC – 1024 to 1279

• Window Size – 2

• Facility – No

• DTE only

• Reverse Charging – No

X.28 and other X.25 Packet Assembly Disassemblies (PADs) are not supported becthere is no provision for protocol sensing.

The call direction is dial-out only. Incoming calls and two-way calls are not supported

Cisco 700 series router software Release 4.2(1) supports Network User Information (and Network User Address (NUA), as described in British Telecom CardWay 0800 PhAccess Platform specification.

ExampleThe following example sets the TPAD to even parity, 7 data bits, and 1 stop bit:

Host> set tpad parity even

Related Commandsset serialportshow tpad


show

lues

showTo display the configuration and the status of both ISDN B channels, use the show command.

SHow


Usage GuidelinesIn profile mode, the show command displays only the profile-based configuration parameters. Parameters that have been changed are indicated by an asterisk (*). Vawithout an asterisk are inherited from the profile template.

In system mode, the show command displays the profile template.

ExampleThe following example shows output from the show command in system mode:

Host> showSystem Parameters

EnvironmentScreen Length 20Echo Mode ONCountryGroup 1

Bridging ParametersLAN Forward Mode ANYWAN Forward Mode ONLYAddress Age Time OFF

Call Startup ParametersMultidestination OFF

Line ParametersSwitch Type 5ESSAuto SPID and Switch Detection OFF

Call Parameters Link 1 Link 2Retry Delay 30 30


show

Profile ParametersBridging Parameters

Bridging ONRouted ProtocolsLearn Mode ONPassthru OFF

Call Startup ParametersLine Parameters

Line Speed AUTONumbering Plan NORMAL

Call Parameters Link 1 Link 2Auto ON ONCalled NumberBackup NumberRingback Number

CLICallback OFF

Status 01/01/1995 00:01:00Line Status

Line DeActivatedTerminal Identifier Unassigned

Port Status Interface Connection LinkCh: 1 Waiting for CallCh: 2 Waiting for Call

Related Commandshow configuration


show callduration

show calldurationTo show the current setting for call duration, use the show callduration command.

SHow CALLD uration

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example shows the time limit of a call:

Host> show calldurationHost> Call Duration Limit 10 min.

Related Commandsset calldurationshow calltime


show calltime

show calltimeTo show the current of time-of-day limits on calls, use the show calltime command.

SHow CALLT ime

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example displays the call-time limits:

Host:2503> show calltime *** Call Time Limits *** DATA Calls Starttime Endtime

Incoming 00:00 14:59Outgoing 00:00 23:59

VOICE Calls Starttime EndtimeIncoming 00:00 04:59Outgoing 00:00 20:59

Related Commandsset calldurationset calltimeshow callduration


show configuration

n lay

show configuration To display a subset of the current configuration parameters, use the show configuration command.

SHow COnfig [AL l]

Syntax Description


Usage GuidelinesIn profile mode, the show configuration command without an argument displays only profile-based configurations. Parameters that have been changed are indicated by aasterisk (*). Values without an asterisk are inherited from the profile template. To dispthe profile template, type the show command in system mode.

Example The following example shows output from the show configuration command in profile mode:

Host> show configSystem Parameters

EnvironmentScreen Length 20Echo Mode ONCountryGroup 1

Bridging ParametersLAN Forward Mode ANYWAN Forward Mode ONLYAddress Age Time OFF

AL l Displays system configurations and profile configurations in both system modeand profile mode.


show configuration

Call Startup ParametersMultidestination OFF

Line ParametersSwitch Type 5ESSSvc Profile ID 1 123123123Directory Number(s) 01123412345Auto SPID and Switch Detection OFF

Call Parameters Link 1 Link 2Retry Delay 30 30

Profile ParametersBridging Parameters

Bridging ONRouted Protocols IPLearn Mode ONPassthru OFF

Call Startup ParametersLine Parameters

Line Speed AUTONumbering Plan NORMAL

Call Parameters Link 1 Link 2 Link DAuto ON ON OFFPermanent Mode ON OFF OFFCalled NumberBackup Number

Related Commandshow demand


show connection

show connectionTo display all current connections, use the show connection command.

SHow CONNection


ExampleThe following example shows output from the show connection command:

Host> show connection

Connections 12/04/1996 17:49:38Start Date & Time # Name # Ethernet

1 12/04/1996 00:00:00 # # 00 00 00 00 00 002 12/04/1996 00:00:00 # Top #

Link: 1 Channel: 1 telephone: 9018Link: 2 Channel: 2 telephone: 9018

Table 2-2 describes the fields shown in the display.

Table 2-2 Show Connection Field Descriptions

Field Description

Connections Connection number assigned by the router.

Start Date Connection start date.

Start Time Connection start time.

Name System ID of the remote device.

Ethernet Ethernet address of the remote device.


show demand

. an the

show demand To display demand and timeout configurations, use the show demand command.

SHow DEmand


Usage GuidelinesIn profile mode, the show demand command displays only profile-based configurationsParameters that have been changed are indicated by an asterisk (*). Values without asterisk are inherited from the profile template. To display the profile template, enter show command in system mode.

ExampleThe following example displays the profile template:

Host> show demandDemand Calling Parameters Link 1 Link 2

Connection Type Auto ON Auto ONThreshold 0 kbs 48 kbsDuration 1 sec 1 secSource LAN BOTH

Timeout (call teardown) Parameters

Threshold 0 kbs 48 kbsDuration OFF OFFSource LAN BOTH

Related Commandsdemandset timeoutshowtimeout


show memstat

MB

show memstat To display the memory configuration, use the show memstat command.

SHow MEmstat


Usage GuidelinesThe RAM size displays in hexadecimal. For example, a Cisco 700 series router with 1displays 0x100000, and a router with 1.5 MB displays 0x180000.

Table 2-3 lists the RAM size hexadecimal values reported by the show memstat command and the corresponding RAM size in megabytes.

ExampleThe following example shows output from the show memstat command:

Host> show memstatID 0: Size: 10 Avail: 8 Max: 8 Used: 1 Addr: 0x000DDBA8ID 1: Size: 30 Avail: 69 Max: 80 Used: 16 Addr: 0x000DDDE2ID 2: Size: 18 Avail: 35 Max: 35 Used: 0 Addr: 0x000DE5A8ID 3: Size: 4 Avail: 36 Max: 36 Used: 0 Addr: 0x000DE850ID 4: Size: 8 Avail: 220 Max: 220 Used: 1 Addr: 0x000DE908ID 5: Size: 32 Avail: 223 Max: 400 Used: 180 Addr: 0x000E0650ID 6: Size: 268 Avail: 20 Max: 20 Used: 1 Addr: 0x000E2238ID 7: Size: 20 Avail: 80 Max: 80 Used: 2 Addr: 0x000E3764ID 8: Size: 14 Avail: 124 Max: 200 Used: 76 Addr: 0x000E41E0

Table 2-3 Device RAM Sizes

RAM Size (hex) Memory

0x100000 1 MB

0x180000 1.5 MB

0x200000 2 MB


show memstat

ID 9: Size: 54 Avail: 38 Max: 50 Used: 17 Addr: 0x000E629AID 10: Size: 8 Avail: 1 Max: 2 Used: 1 Addr: 0x000EEC40ID 11: Size: 54 Avail: 6 Max: 6 Used: 0 Addr: 0x000EEC70ID 12: Size: 462 Avail: 4 Max: 4 Used: 0 Addr: 0x000EF588ID 13: Size: 134 Avail: 2 Max: 2 Used: 0 Addr: 0x000F00C0ID 14: Size: 68 Avail: 5 Max: 5 Used: 1 Addr: 0x000F0BB8ID 15: Size: 96 Avail: 5 Max: 6 Used: 2 Addr: 0x000F0DA0ID 16: Size: 112 Avail: 2 Max: 2 Used: 0 Addr: 0x000F0FA8NVStore Used: 1203, Remaining 6989 (Deleted 77 + Unused 6912), Total 8192RamStore Used: 0, Remaining 10000, Total 10000RAM Size = 0x180000

Available memory=517088, Allocs=119, Frees=0MbufAllocs=0x5, MbufFrees=0x5, MbufFail=0x0IbufAllocs=0x0, IbufFrees=0x0, IbufFails=0x0MlenMax=0xe0, MlenAvail=0xe0, MlenLow=0xdf, MlenAllocs=0x5, MlenFails=0x0ZeroMax=0x0, ZeroAvail=0x0, ZeroLow=0x7fff, ZeroAllocs=0x0, ZeroFails=0x0


show packets

show packetsTo display packet count statistics, use the show packets command.

SHow [connection | LA n] PAckets

Syntax Description


ExamplesThe following example shows the statistics for connection 14:

host> show 14 packetsPacket Statistics for Connection 14Filtered: 11013246 Forwarded: 8400 Received: 5993Dropped: 263 Lost: 0 Corrupted: 0 Misordered: 1Compression Ratio: 1.73:1Ethernet Type: 0806 Count: 3375Ethernet Type: 0800 Count: 979Ethernet Type: 80f3 Count: 1068Ethernet Type: 809b Count: 48718

connection Display packet statistics for the connection number. If no connection number is entered, the router displays statistics for the current profile.

LA n Display packet statistics for the LAN connection.


show packets

The following example shows statistics for the LAN connection:

Host> show lan packetsPacket Statistics for LANFiltered: 11001795 Forwarded: 12411637 Received: 25496880Dropped: 0 Lost: 6911 Corrupted: 46 Misordered: 0Ethernet Type: 0806 Count: 3375Ethernet Type: 0800 Count: 979Ethernet Type: 80f3 Count: 1068Ethernet Type: 809b Count: 48718

Table 2-4 describes the fields.

Table 2-4 Show Packets Field Descriptions

Field Description

Filtered Packets received by the bridge engine and not forwarded.

Forwarded Packets forwarded to specified connection.

Received Packets received from the specified connection.

Dropped Packets received from the connection and dropped because the queue of packets to be forwarded was too long.

Lost Packets received from the connection but not successfully transmitted (often because of a faulty Ethernet connection).

Corrupted Packets received from the connection with a bad checksum (CRC) that were discarded as corrupted.

Misordered Packet received out of sequence when using ordered or fragmented protocol.

Compression Packets compressed.

Ethernet Type Broadcast packet types received.

Count Number of packets of this type received.


show tpad

show tpad To display the TPAD parity, use the show tpad command.

SHow TPad

Default None

Command Mode System or profile level

ExampleThe following example displays the TPAD parity setting:

Host> show tpadTPAD Serial Port Parity :NONETPAD Echo Response :ONTPAD Response Mode :Verbose ModeTPAD Carrier Wait Time :10 seconds

Related Commandsset serialportset tpad parity


show users

show usersTo display all profiles and their status, use the show users command.

SHow USers


Example The following example shows output from the show users command:

Host> show usersUser State Connection--------------------------------------------LAN Active LANInternal Active INTERNALStandard Active 1tomd Inactive


Table 2-5 Show Users Field Descriptions

Field Description

Profile Name Name of profile.

State Active or inactive.

Connection Name or number of the connection assigned to the profile.


swl

g ble

(See r.)

s a

en

swlTo download new router software or configuration files across a TCP/IP network usinTrivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) or through the configuration port using a serial calink, use the swl command.

SWL [TFTP] [CONFIG ] [ ipaddress filename]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe swl command assumes that communications occur through the configuration port.Cisco 700 Series Installation Guide for information on connecting a terminal to the route

TFTP Load the software across a TCP/IP network by using TFTP or use the router as a TFTP server, depending on the status of the ipaddress and filename parameters. When the parameters are not included, the router iTFTP (proxy) server.

CONFIG Load a configuration file across a TCP/IP network by using TFTP.

ipaddress TFTP server IP address used when the router acts as a TFTP client. Whthe ipaddress is included, the filename must also be included.

filename Name of the software image file when the router acts as a TFTP client during download. The filename should include the directory path if the file is not in the server default directory. When the filename is included, the ipaddress must also be included.


swl

hen y e

le. If was must

out

erial l or

is

The swl tftp command assumes that communications occur through a TFTP server.

The swl tftp command loads the software across a TCP/IP network by using TFTP wthe ipaddress and filename are included. The command sets the router as a TFTP proxserver when an ipaddress and filename are not included. The software or configuration filmust be stored on a client server. (TFTP server mode times out in 1 minute.)

On the TFTP client, you must use binary file transfer mode to transfer the software fithe transfer is successful, the router reboots using the downloaded software and thedownloaded configuration (if a configuration file was also downloaded). If the transfer not successful, the router displays an error message or fails to boot, and the softwarebe reloaded.

The TFTP client and TFTP server implementation is based on RFC 1350. TFTP timeinterval and transfer size options are not implemented.

ExamplesThe following example loads the operating system software in the router through a sconnection from the terminal to the configuration port. (You can use an ASCII terminaa personal computer running terminal emulation software.)

To load software with the swl command, follow these steps:

Step 1 Connect your terminal to the configuration port on the router.

Step 2 Set the baud rate for the terminal to 9600 and the protocol to 8N1.

Step 3 Turn on power to the router. The router boots, and when the boot process complete, the router displays a prompt.

Step 4 Enter the swl command:

Host> swl

You are prompted to verify that you are downloading the software image.

Step 5 Enter y to continue:

Are you sure? y


swl

l

You are prompted for the baud rate.

BOOT version 2.0(1) 04-16-96 12:03:06Copyright (c) 1993-1996. All rights reserved.

Ready to upload new firmware into flash. Select baud rate:

1 - 300 baud 2 - 1200 baud 3 - 2400 baud 4 - 4800 baud 5 - 9600 baud 6 - 19200 baud 7 - 38400 baud 8 - 57600 baud 9 - 115200 baud

Step 6 At the prompt, enter one of the baud rates listed (do not press the Return key), and make sure that the load rate you choose is supported by your terminaemulation software. Table 2-6 shows the approximate software load times.

Step 7 Change the baud rate of the terminal to the appropriate download rate.

Step 8 Set the protocol to ASCII on the terminal.

Step 9 Download the file containing the new software to the router by following theprompts on your terminal. (The LINE LED blinks throughout the loading process.)

Table 2-6 Approximate Software Load Time

Load Rate (Baud) Approximate Time (Minutes)

2400 48

9600 12

19200 6

38400 3

57600 2

115200 1


swl

baud

D

he our s

ew

hed

e

You are prompted to change the terminal baud rate to 9600.

Change settings to 8n1/9600 baud and press a key

Step 10 Change the baud rate of the terminal emulation software to the appropriate rate and press any key.

When the download is successful, the LINE LED turns off, and the RDY LEturns on. If the download was not successful, use Table 2-7, which shows symptoms and possible solutions.

TFTP File Transfer ExampleThe following example shows the transfer of an image by using TFTP. The router is tserver and the workstation is the client. (Before beginning this procedure, configure yworkstation to operate as a TFTP client. In server mode, the workstation only acceptput requests for the file.

Step 1 Check the file directory to confirm that the new software and, optionally, the nconfiguration file are installed on the TFTP server.

Step 2 Ping the TFTP server from the router to confirm that the router can be reacfrom the client machine:

Host> ping clientipaddress

Table 2-7 Software Download Command Troubleshooting

Symptom Probable Cause and Solution

Download takes significantly longer than the approximate time listed in Table 2-6.

The terminal emulation program interline and intercharacter delaysare not set to zero. If the load was successful, no further action is necessary. If the load was terminated prematurely, reset the interlinand intercharacter delays to zero, and reload the software.

The terminal displays unrecognizable text after the download is completed.

The terminal has not been reset to 9600 baud. Reset the terminal any time after loading the new software. After changing the terminal baud rate, press Return to gain access to the standard prompt (>).

Two or more LEDs are blinking.

Incorrect configuration of the PC COM port or a defective console cable. Press Esc on the keyboard, and try to load the software again.


swl

Caution When the swl tftp command is entered, the existing software is erased. If a catastrophic event such as a power failure occurs before the file transfer is complete, the router must be initialized through the configuration port.

Step 3 Enter the swl tftp command to load the software image on the router:

Host> swl tftp 171.69.91.33 foxus.flAre you sure? yHost>SWL TFTP: Starting transfer ...SWL TFTP: Transfer successful.Image received successfully.Burning flash, standby (15 seconds max.) ...

The software is downloaded. You can follow the same procedure using theswl tftp config command to download a configuration:

Host> swl tftp config 171.69.91.33 efoxcfg.txtAre you sure? yHost>SWL TFTP: Starting transfer ...SWL TFTP: Transfer successful.SWL TFTP: Erasing old configuration.Host> Connection 1 ClosedHost> Connection 2 ClosedHost> Connection 3 ClosedHost> Connection 4 ClosedHost>SWL TFTP: Setting new configuration.


swl

s, a

Configuration Load ExampleThe following example loads a configuration. (The example uses Terminal for Windowcommonly used terminal emulation program. You can use other terminal emulation software.) Although this is not part of the swl command, the following example is providedfor your convenience:

Step 1 From the terminal emulation program, go to the Setting menu, and select Text Transfer. The Text Transfer dialog box appears.

Step 2 Set flow control to Line at a Time, and set Delay Between Lines to 0.5 to 1 second.

Step 3 Click OK.

Step 4 From the Transfer menu, select Send Text File.

Step 5 Select the file to be loaded.

Step 6 Click OK . The parameters are transferred to your router.

Step 7 If errors occur during the transfer, enter the set default command, increase the delay between lines, and repeat the procedure for loading the configurationbeginning with Step 1.

Related Commandshow security


test

testTo generate test packets, use the test command.

TEst [connection] [WAn | AL l] [ STop | REsult | ETher] RAte pps [MI npkts bytes MA xpkts bytes]

Syntax Description

connection Number of the connections where test packets are generated.

WA n Generate test packets on the (WAN) ISDN line. Packets should be sent to a WAN switch that has a loopback enabled. Compare number of sent packets to number of received packets.

AL l Generate test packets on both the ISDN line and on the LAN.

STop Stop all test packets from being generated.

REsult Display results of last completed test.

ETher Generate test packets on the LAN and compare the number of sent packets to the number of received packets.

RAte Rate in packets per second (pps) at which test packets are generated. The rate can be between 1 and 100; the default value is 10.

MI npkts Minimum size (in bytes) of test packets. The size can be between 60 and 1514; the default value is 60.

Packets are generated in incrementally larger sizes, starting with the minimum size and ending with the maximum size. After the maximum length is reached, the next packet is the minimum size.

MA xpkts Maximum size in bytes of test packets. The size can be between 60 and 1514; the default value is 1514.


test

Default None


ExampleThe following example enables a test on the ISDN line and the LAN with a minimumpacket size of 255 bytes and a maximum packet size of 1024 bytes:

Host> test all min 255 max 1024


upload

FTP

t.

to

uploadTo send a set of ASCII strings containing the current configuration to the terminal or Tclient, use the upload command.

UPload [TFTP ipaddress filename]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe upload command (without any parameters) sends the current configuration to theconsole port. The upload tftp command uploads the configuration through a TFTP clien

You can use the captured file to reconfigure the router after loading new software or configure multiple routers with the same parameters.

Set the ASCII download for 1 second so that each line is correctly processed.

TFTP Upload the configuration across a TCP/IP network by using TFTP. The output goes to the console port if this parameter is not included.

ipaddress TFTP server IP address.

filename Name of the file where the router configuration is to be stored on the TFTP server. The filename field should include the directory path if the file is not in the default directory of the server.


upload

ding a

.1.1,

Password and secret information are encrypted for security reasons. If you are reloaconfiguration into a router for reconfiguration, all password and secret information is loaded.

ExampleThe following example uses TFTP to send the router configuration to IP address 10.1filename 700ted.cfg:

Host> upload tftp 10.1.1.1 700ted.cfg

Related Commandsset defaultset echoswl


version

ntry.

versionTo display the software release level and date, use the version command.

VErsion

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example shows output from the version command:

Host> versionSoftware Version c760-in.r.US 4.2(1) - Aug 13 1998 08:34:02Cisco 761ISDN Stack Revision US 2.10 (5ESS/DMS/NI-1)Copyright (c) 1993-1997 by Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.Software is used subject to software license agreement containedwith this product. By using this product you agree to accept theterms of the software license.Hardware Configuration:

DRAM: 1.5MBFlash: 0.5MBPOTS: Type 2 (Rev. Unknown)NT1: Not InstalledROM: 2.1(1) ALPHA-7

Table 2-8 lists the specific types of basic telephone service (POTS) used in each cou


version

Table 2-8 POTS Types and Countries

Board Types Countries

Type 0 Mexico, United States

Type 1 Canada, Japan, Korea, Netherlands, Singapore, Taiwan

Type 2 Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hong Kong, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom


C H A P T E R

Profile Command

3

Profile Commands

ection

dified s, icate the

nent in the

This chapter describes the commands used to create, modify, delete, and display user-defined profiles. Profile mode parameters affect how the router handles the connto a device and consist of individual parameters, maintained in configuration sets.

User-defined profiles can be created, so individual parameters do not have to be moto establish different connections. The router also maintains three permanent profileInternal, LAN, and Standard. The Internal profile stores parameters used to communbetween the LAN and WAN ports. The LAN profile stores parameters that configure LAN port on the router. The Standard profile is the default profile.

The commands to display profile information apply to both the user-defined and permaprofiles. A detailed discussion on how profiles are used in Cisco 700 series routers is Cisco 700 Series Router Configuraiton Guide.

s 3-1

reset user

de.

reset userTo delete a profile, use the reset user command.

REset USer username

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe profile is removed and if you are in profile mode, you are returned to system mo

ExampleThe following steps delete the user-defined profile named 2503:

Step 1 Enter the reset user command:

Host:2503> reset user 2503

Step 2 Enter y in response to the verification prompt:

Are you sure> yHost>

If you do not want to delete the profile, enter n or press Return without responding to the request.

username Name of the profile to be deleted.


reset user

Related Commandsset activeset usershow profile

Profile Commands 3-3

set active

itch

set activeTo set a profile to active, use the set active command.

SEt ACtive [username]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesNewly created profiles are inactive by default. Profiles are active after the set active command has been issued and you reboot the router.

When a profile is active, outgoing WAN packets cause a call to be made to a WAN sw(if on-demand dialing is enabled with the set auto command). All incoming calls are answered.

When a profile is inactive, outgoing WAN packets do not cause the router to automaticallydial out. The call must be initiated manually with the call command before the router will forward the packets. However, all incoming calls are answered.

username When executed in system mode, the named profile is set to active. In profile mode, the username is not necessary; the profile from which the command is issued is set to active.


set active

ExampleThe following example configures profile 2503 to be active and opens a connection:

Host> set active 2503 Connection 2 opened

Related Commandscallset autoset inactiveset user


set inactive

itch

set inactive To set a profile to inactive, use the set inactive command.

SEt INAC tive [username]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesNewly created profiles are inactive by default. Profiles are active after the set active command has been issued and you reboot the router.

When a profile is active, outgoing WAN packets cause a call to be made to a WAN sw(if on-demand dialing is enabled with the set auto command). All incoming calls are answered.

When a profile is inactive, outgoing WAN packets do not cause the router to automaticallydial out. The call must be initiated manually with the call command before the router will forward the packets. However, all incoming calls are answered.

ExampleThe following example sets the profile 2503 to be inactive:

Host> set inactive 2503Connection 2 closed

username Username of the profile to be deactivated.


set inactive

Related Commandsset autoset activeset user


set profile

t, use

to if

ed.

set profileTo change a profile name and profile activity status after power on and call disconnecthe set profile command:

SEt PROFile [POwerup = ACtive | INactive] [DIsconnect = DEactivate | KEep] [USer = new profile name]

Syntax Description

Defaultspowerup activedisconnect keep

POwerup Profile activation state when the router is powered on.

ACtive Profile becomes active when the router is powered on. If a profile is set active, outgoing WAN packets cause a call to be made to a WAN switch (on-demand dialing is enabled with the set auto command). All incoming calls are answered.

INactive Profile is inactive when the router is powered on. If a profile is set to inactive, outgoing WAN packets do not cause the router to dial out automatically. The call can be initiated manually with the call command. However, all incoming calls are answered.

DIsconnect Profile activation state when the physical connection has been terminat

DEactivate Profile becomes inactive when all the links of its physical connection aredisconnected.

KEep Profile remains active when all the links of its physical connection are disconnected.

USer Use to change the name of an existing profile.


set profile

ome

up


Usage GuidelinesIncoming calls from a remote device associated with a profile cause that profile to becactive regardless of the profile activity settings.

ExampleThe following example configures the profile 2503 to be inactive after the unit powersand inactive after all physical links to a remote device are disconnected:

Host:2503> set profile powerup inactive disconnect deactivate

Related Commandsset autoset user


set profile id

lling

ery

set profile idTo associate the Ethernet address of a WAN switch with a profile, use the set profile id command.

SEt PROfile ID ethernetaddress

Syntax Description

DefaultNo Ethernet address configured.


ExampleThe following example configures the profile 2503 with the Ethernet address of the carouter:

Host:2503> set profile id 00000c0012ff

Related Commandsset autoset user

ethernetaddress Ethernet address of a remote device associated with the profile. Evprofile must have an Ethernet address entered with this command.

When the router receives a call, it uses the Ethernet address of a remote device to locate the correct profile.


set user

ofile,

name

es tion.

e

set userTo create a new user-defined profile or modify the name of an existing user-defined pruse the set user command.

SEt USer [username] [ INcoming | OUTgoing]

Syntax Description

Usage GuidelinesIn system mode, the command creates a new user-defined profile if a profile by that does not already exist or changes the status of an existing profile. In profile mode, it changes the name and the status of the user-defined profile. The incoming and outgoing keywords are shortcuts for the set profile and set auto commands.

username Name of the profile. A profile name can be 1 to 64 characters long. Namare case sensitive only when they are displayed and used for authentica

INcoming The profile is initialized for incoming calls only. The profile must have thfollowing values:

• Powerup inactive (change with the set profile command)

• Disconnect deactivate (change with the set profile command)

• On-demand dialing off (change with the set auto command)

If this keyword is not specified, the profile applies to both incoming and outgoing calls.

OUTgoing The profile is initialized for incoming or outgoing calls. The profile must have the following values:

• Powerup active (change with the set profile command)

• Disconnect keep (change with the set profile command)

• On-demand dialing on (change with the set auto command)


set user

s:

DefaultOutgoing


ExamplesThe following example configures a new profile named 2503:

Host> set user 2503 outgoingHost:2503>

The following example changes an outgoing profile to be optimized for incoming call

Host> set user 2503 incomingHost:2503>

Related Commandsset autoset profile


show profile

d

show profileTo display the Ethernet address and activity status of the current profile, use the show profile command.

SHow PRofile


ExampleThe following example shows output from the show profile command for profile 2503:

Host:2503> show profileProfile for user Ethernet Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Power Up ACTIVATE Disconnect KEEP


Table 3-1 Show Profile Field Descriptions

Field Description

Ethernet Address Ethernet address of the WAN switch associated with the profile. Configurewith the set profile id command.

Powerup Indicates whether the profile is active when the router is powered on. Configured with the set active command.

Disconnect Indicates if the profile remains active after a physical connection to the WANswitch has been terminated. Configured with the set active command.

<*> Indicates the value applies to this profile only.


unset

unsetTo return profile-configured parameters to the profile template value, use the unset command.

UNset commandparameter

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesTable 3-2 lists the original command modifiers that can be unset.

commandparameter Original set command used to configure the parameter.

Table 3-2 Unset Command Syntax Description

Original Command Unset Command Syntax

set link auto unset link auto

set bridging unset bridging

set callerid unset callerid

set compression unset compression

set link demand unset link demand

set learn unset learn

set link number unset link number


unset

03 to

ExampleThe following example returns the PPP client password in the user-defined profile 25the password in the profile template:

Host:2503> unset ppp password client

set link permanent unset link permanent

set ppp authentication unset ppp authentication

set ppp callback unset ppp callback

set ppp password host unset ppp password host

set ppp secret host unset ppp secret host

set passthru unset passthru

set link ringback unset link ringback

set speed unset speed

set link timeout unset link timeout

Table 3-2 Unset Command Syntax Description (continued)

Original Command Unset Command Syntax


unset


C H A P T E R

Security Command

4

Security Commands
This chapter describes the commands used to manage router security as it relates to
modifying the configuration and monitoring the activity of the router.

s 4-1

login

es.

er in

e s

le

loginTo log into a remote router to make configuration changes, use the login command.

LOGI n [ipaddress | ethernetaddress | connectionid | REmote]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone

Command Mode System or profile mode

Usage GuidelinesIf access to the router has been restricted with the set local access command, you are required to enter the router system password before making any configuration chang

ipaddress IP address of a device on the same IP network or to a remote routconnected across the ISDN line. The IP address must be entered four-part dotted decimal format.

ethernetaddress Used with bridging, the Ethernet address logs into a router on the same Ethernet segment or to a remote router connected across thISDN line. The Ethernet address must be entered as 12 contiguouhexadecimal characters with no spaces.

connectionid User profile connection identification used for remote login.

REmote Log into a router connected to the ISDN line. Use this keyword whiin profile mode.


login

inal your

he

You can only log into a remote Cisco 700 series router directly connected to your termor to a remote Cisco 700 series router with an active ISDN or Ethernet connection torouter. After 5 minutes of no activity, the remote router logs you out. Use the logout command to manually log out of the remote router.

Used without an argument or keyword, this command logs you into the router directlyconnected to your terminal through the console port.

ExampleThe following example shows how to log into a remote router, from a profile, across tISDN connection by using the remote router IP address:

Host> login 150.150.50.25 remote

Related Commandslogoutset local accessset remote access

Security Commands 4-3

logout

logout To end any remote session initiated with the login command, use the logout command.

LOGO ut

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example ends a remote session initiated with the login command:

Host> logout

Related Commandloginset local accessset remote access


reset calleridreceive

hen

reset calleridreceiveTo delete one or all of the telephone numbers from which the router receives calls wcaller ID is enabled, use the reset callidreceive command:

REset CALLI dreceive number | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example deletes a caller ID receive number entered with the set callidreceive command:

Host> reset callidreceive 5559020

Related Commandsset calledridset callidreceive

number Remote router telephone number entered with the set callidreceive command.

AL l Delete all remote router telephone numbers entered with the set callidreceive command.


set callerid

set calleridTo enable ISDN caller ID authentication, use the set callerid command.

SEt CALLE rid ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff (disabled)

Command ModeSystem level

Usage GuidelinesThe calling device is authenticated by its telephone number using caller ID (a serviceoffered by the ISDN service provider).

ExampleThe following example enables caller ID checking for all ISDN connections:

Host> set callerid on

Related Commandset callidreceive

ON Enable ISDN caller ID authentication.

OFf Disable ISDN caller ID authentication.


set clicallback

tware

set clicallbackTo change the callback delay, use the set clicallback command:

SEt CLIC allback OFf | ON [# of digit to match] [DElay seconds]

Syntax Description

Default10-second delay for all switch types.


Usage GuidelinesIn software Release 4.0(1), the callback delay was a fixed value of 3 seconds. In sofRelease 4.1(2) and higher, the value can be set from 3 to 30 seconds by using the set clicallback delay command.

Because clicallback rejects calls when a match is found and cliauthentication accepts calls when a match is found, clicallback has precedence over cliauthentication. For cliauthentication to be active, clicallback must be turned off.

ON Enables caller ID callback.

OFf Disables caller ID callback.

# of digit to match Minimum number of digits (from right to left) to be matched.

seconds Time between the rejection of incoming messages and the callback. Valid range is 3 to 30 seconds.


set clicallback

ExampleThe following example sets the callback delay to 7 seconds:

Host> set clicallback on delay 7

Related Commandsset callidreceive


set callidreceive

r ID

when

s

set callidreceive To enter the ISDN telephone number from which the router accepts calls when callechecking is enabled, use the set callidreceive command.

SEt CALLI dreceive number

Syntax Description

DefaultNo caller ID receive number is configured.

Command ModeSystem level

Usage GuidelinesTo delete a telephone number set with this command, use the reset calleridreceive command.

ExampleThe following example enters the telephone number for a remote router authenticatedcaller ID checking is enabled:

Host> set callidreceive 4085559020

Related Commandsreset calleridreceiveset callerid

number ISDN phone number of a remote router from which the router accepts callwhen caller ID checking is enabled with the set callerid command.


set local access

set local accessTo restrict the commands allowed at the local port, use the set localaccess command.

SEt LOcalaccess ON | PArtial | PROtected

Syntax Description

DefaultOn (enabled for all commands)


Usage GuidelinesTo use dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) commands from the telephone keypad, theset local access command must be set to on. The set password command must be set. Table 4-1 describes the set local access command settings.

ON Set commands to be performed without restriction.

PArtial Set commands to be performed with partial restriction.

PROtected Set commands to be performed with system password only.

Table 4-1 set localaccess Command Settings

Command On Partial Protected

call See Note1 P2

cd P

demand P P

disconnect P


set local access

ExampleThe following example configures local configuration access to protected:

Host> set localaccess protected

establish P

help P

log P

login and logout

ping P

reboot P P

release P

reset commands P P

set commands P P

show commands P

software load P P

test commands P

timeout P P

unlearn P

unset commands P P

upload P P

version P

1 An empty cell indicates that the command can be performed remotely without restrictions.

2 P indicates that the system password must be entered before using the command.

Table 4-1 set localaccess Command Settings (continued)

Command On Partial Protected


set local access

Related Commandset password


set logout

set logoutTo set the inactivity timer for remote logins, use the set logout command.

SEt LOGout minutes

Syntax Description

Default5 minutes


ExampleThe following example disables the remote inactivity timer session:

Set logout 0

Related Commandloginlogout

minutes Number of minutes of inactivity on a remote login Telnet session beforethe remote user is logged out. To disable the auto logout feature, use alogout value of 0.


set password

ceded tem is

into

set password To set a password, use the set password command.

SEt PAssword SYstem [ENcrypted] [<password>]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo passwords


Usage GuidelinesThe system password can consist of 1 to 30 characters. The command should be prewith the set remote access or set local access command. If a password is not included inthe command line, you are prompted to enter the password. When configuring a syspassword, you are also prompted for a username to associate with the password. Thusername can consist of 1 to 7 characters.

The encrypted parameter is used by the computer when loading a saved configurationthe router. If UPL is run, the system password is displayed. For example:

set password system encrypted 053b2b3c09641f

SYstem Configure the system password that authenticates users requesting a local or remote configuration session.

ENcrypted Used by the computer when loading a saved configuration text file (UPL output) into the router.

password Password used for authentication. If the password is absent from the command statement, you are prompted for the entry.


set password

uter

.

been

ord to

When this command is loaded back into the original router (or another router), the roknows the password is already encrypted by examining the encrypted parameter.

Warning You should not use the encrypted parameter when typing in the system password manually. If you do, the router will try to decrypt it, and you will not be able to log into the router.

The password can be included in a configuration file, which can generate a set password command that includes unencrypted or encrypted passwords for PPP authentication

Note that the system password protects remote access, but not local access. Beforedownloading a configuration, a remote user has to enter a system password (if it hasset), but a local user does not. For example, an unauthorized user can use the upload command to generate PPP CHAP or PAP authentication and cut-and-paste the passwa local console.

ExamplesThe following example configures a host password for profile 2503:

Step 1 Enter the set password command:

Host:2503> set password system

Step 2 Enter your host password. (Your password is not echoed on the screen.):

Enter new Password: < new password >

Step 3 Reenter your host password for confirmation:

Re-Type new Password: < new password >

Step 4 Enter the username you want associated with the host password:

Enter User Name: johndoe


set password

Related Commandsloginlogoutset local accessset remote access


set remote access

set remote accessTo restrict remote configuration access to the router, use the set remote access command.

SEt REmoteaccess OFf | PRotected | PArtial

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesTable 4-2 describes the set remote access command settings.

OFf No remote login sessions are allowed.

PRotected Set commands to be performed with system password only.

PArtial Set commands to be performed with partial restrictions.

Table 4-2 set remote access Command Settings

Commands Partial Protected Off

call See Note.1 P2 X3

demand P P X

disconnect P X

help P X

log commands P X


set remote access

ExampleThe following example configures the router for protected remote access:

Host> set remote access protected

login X

logout X

reboot P X

reset commands P P X

set commands P P X

show commands P X

software load P P X

test commands P X

timeout P P X

unset commands P P X

upload P X

version P X

cd P

establish P

ping P

release P

unlearn P

1 An empty cell indicates that the command can be performed remotely without restrictions.2 P indicates that a system password must be entered before this command can be performed

remotely.3 X indicates that this command cannot be performed remotely.

Table 4-2 set remote access Command Settings (continued)

Commands Partial Protected Off


set remote access

Related Commandset local accessset password


show security

show securityTo display the security configurations, use the show security command.

SHow SEcurity [AL l]

Syntax Description


ExampleThe following example shows output from the show security command in system mode:

Host> show securitySystem ParametersSecurity

Access StatusSystem Password N ERemote Configuration PROTECTEDLocal ConfigurationLogout Timeout 5Caller ID Security OFFCaller Id Numbers

PPP SecurityPPP Authentication IN CHAP PAPCHAP REFUSE NONECHAP ALLOW MULTIHOST OFF

Profile ParametersPPP Security

PPP Authentication OUT NONEToken Authentication Support

TAS Client 0.0.0.0Use Local CHAP Secret ON

AL l In profile mode, display all security configurations as if the command were issued in system mode. Ignored in system mode.


show security

ClientUser Name NONEPAP Password NONE

CHAP Secret NONEHost

PAP Password NONECHAP Secret NONE

CallbackRequest OFFReply OFF

The following example shows output from the show security command in profile mode:

Host:temp> show security>PPP SecurityPPP Authentication OUT NONE PPP Authentication ACCEPT EITHER Token Authentication Support

TAS Client 0.0.0.0 Use Local CHAP Secret ON

ClientUser Name odc7PAP Password NONECHAP Secret NONE

HostPAP Password NONE CHAP Secret NONE

CallbackRequest OFF Reply OFF

Table 4-3 lists the significant fields shown in the display.

Table 4-3 show security Command Fields

Field Description

System Parameters Security configurations that apply to system mode.

Access Status Indicates remote access is enabled. Can be on or off.

System Password Indicates a system password has been entered with the set password system command. Can be none or exists.


show security

Remote Configuration Remote access restriction as configured with the set remote access command.

Local Configuration Local configuration restriction as configured with the set local access command.

Caller ID Security Indicates caller ID is enabled. Can be on or off.

Caller ID Number Phone numbers entered with the set calleridreceive command.

PPP Authentication In PPP authentication method for incoming calls. Can be PAP, CHAP,none, or any combination of these three. Set with the set ppp authentication in command.

Profile Parameters Security configurations that apply to the profile. If you are using theshow security command in system mode, these configurations make up the profile template for security parameters.

PPP Authentication Out PPP authentication method used for outgoing calls. Can be PAP, CHAP, none, or any combination of these three. Set with the set ppp authentication out command.

PAP Client Password PAP client password entered with the set ppp password command. Can be none or exists.

CHAP Client Secret CHAP client password entered with the set ppp secret command. Can be none or exists.

Callback ID Security Indicates callback authentication is enabled. Can be on or off.

CHAP Refuse Indicates rejection of CHAP challenges.

CHAP Allow Multihost Indicates whether chap challenges with multiple hostnames are allowed. Can be on or off.

Callback Indicates callback is enabled. Can be on or off.

Callback Numbers Numbers entered with the set clicallback command.

Number of Host Passwords

Number of host passwords that have been entered with the set password command.

PAP Host Password PAP host password entered with the set ppp password command. Can be none or exists.

Table 4-3 show security Command Fields (continued)

Field Description


show security

e

Related Commandsset clicallback set local accessset passwordset ppp authenticationset ppp passwordset ppp secretset remote access

CHAP Host Secret CHAP host password entered with the set ppp secret command. Can be none or exists.

Callback Request Request a callback from the remote unit. Can be on or off.

Callback Reply Perform a callback if requested to do so by the remote router. Can bon or off.

Table 4-3 show security Command Fields (continued)

Field Description


show security


C H A P T E R

ISDN Calling Command

5

ISDN Calling Commands

vice

vided

n ce er is . For r

ctory calls ming

This chapter describes the commands used to configure Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) calling, such as on-demand dialing and security.

Configuring Directory Numbers This section describes the association between the ISDN directory numbers, the serprofile identification numbers (SPIDs) and the analog telephone port(s) of the router.

Note Detailed information regarding the commands discussed in this chapter are proin the Cisco 700 Series Router Command Reference.

SPIDs and Directory NumbersSPIDS are in common use only in North America. If you are using ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) service in North America, your telephone service provider might assigzero, one, or two SPIDs to your BRI line, depending on what kind of switch the serviprovider uses. For 5ESS Custom switches, no SPID is assigned if the service providusing a point-to-point switch, and one SPID is usually assigned for a multipoint switchDMS-100, NI1 and NI1-compliant switches, two SPIDs are usually assigned. All otheswitch types usually do not use SPIDs.

If your BRI line is assigned two SPIDs, it is suggested that you use the first SPID direnumber for data calls and the second SPID directory number for the incoming voice to reduce the chances a data call will be disconnected when the router receives incovoice calls.

s 5-1

Configuring Directory Numbers

our ciated

to two

o an tory

ports.

sed at used

ion of ine. ry

ports

SPIDs define the services available to the router. SPID numbers are determined by yservice provider. For example, a directory number is considered a service and is assowith a SPID. A SPID can have more than one directory number associated with it. Cisco 700 series routers support up to three directory numbers for each SPID and up SPIDs, for a total of six directory numbers.

Analog Telephone PortsThe analog telephone ports are basic telephone service (POTS) ports, as opposed tISDN telephone port, such as the S/T port. The POTS ports are mapped to the direcnumbers.

Cisco 765, Cisco 766, Cisco 775, and Cisco 776 routers have two analog telephone The phone numbers for the ports are assigned using the set phone command. However, if your BRI line is assigned zero or one SPID, only one analog telephone port can be uone time. If your BRI line is assigned two SPIDs, both analog telephone ports can besimultaneously.

If no directory numbers are associated (mapped) to the POTS ports, the default functanalog telephones is dependent on the number of SPIDs assigned to the ISDN BRI lTable 5-1 describes the default behavior of the POTS ports if your SPIDs and directonumbers are defined and you do not use the set phone command to configure the POTS ports.

Table 5-1 Analog Telephone Port Operation—Defaults

Analog Telephone Port OperationNo SPIDs or One SPID Two SPIDs

SPIDs Not Used1

1 SPIDs are used only inside North America. This column shows the behavior of the analog telephone for devices outside North America, where SPIDs are not used.

All incoming calls ring Phone 1. X2

2 An X indicates that the behavior applies for this configuration.

X X

Phone 1 can call Phone 2. X X

Two data calls are connected and voice priority is configured to always. If calls on the Phone 1 and Phone 2 ports are at the same time, only one data call is disconnected.

X X


Data Over Voice Bearer Service

riff rt line

calls in

Data Over Voice Bearer ServiceThis section applies only to North American analog telephone services.

The router recognizes the difference between a data call and a voice call. In some taareas, voice calls are less expensive than data calls. Cisco 700 series routers suppoincoming and outgoing DOV calls. DOV calls are data calls made over the BRI (voice)using Voice Bearer Capability (VBC).

If a directory number has been configured for DOV, incoming data calls with VBC arerouted to the LAN through the Ethernet port, as shown in Figure 5-1. Incoming voice are forwarded to the analog (voice) device over the analog telephone port, as shownFigure 5-2.

Figure 5-1 Data Call with VBC

Figure 5-2 Voice Call over VBC Line

Central office switch

ISDN BRI linewith VBC

Analog telephoneEthernet LAN

H1

07

75

ISDN BRI line with VBC

Analog telephoneEthernet LAN

H1

07

76

ISDN Calling Commands 5-3

Automatic Data Call Disconnect

ry

ing

eated d for

d two

ata

The set dov command instructs the router to treat incoming calls to a specified directonumber as data calls. (Before using the set phone command to configure DOV, you must set the directory number with the correct SPID, as described in the section “ConfigurDirectory Numbers,” in this chapter.)

Any call received on the port that has been associated with this directory number is tras DOV and is forwarded to the LAN. One or two directory numbers can be configureDOV with the set phone command.

The set speed command with the voice keyword sets VBC on for outgoing DOV calls, enabling the features of VBC and DOV.

Automatic Data Call DisconnectYou can automatically disconnect a data call when a voice call is made or received andata calls are in progress. The set voicepriority command determines if a data call will bedisconnected when the router makes or receives a voice call.

If the priority is set to always, data calls are always bumped in favor of voice calls.

If the priority is set to conditional, the data call is disconnected from one channel if the dcall can continue over another channel.

If the priority is set to never, data calls are never bumped in favor of voice calls.

If the priority is set to disable, data calls are handled as indicated by the set phone DOV command.

The voice priority mode is dependent on several factors, including the following:

• Whether one or two ISDN B channels have data calls in progress

• If two ISDN B channels have data calls in progress, whether the B channels are connected to the same destination or to different destinations


Distinctive Ringing

support

Distinctive RingingCisco 700 series routers have a Distinctive Ring Manager (DRM) that can support distinctive ringing cadences for up to six external devices using the set phone command. These external devices can be a telephone or fax machine. Each POTS interface can up to three devices.


call

the

have

callTo make a manual ISDN call on a specified link to a specified telephone number, usecall command.

CAll [ object] [number]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe object parameter can take one of these forms:

1 Connection

A logical data stream that connects the unit to the remote device. A connection canmultiple links associated with it. The syntax format for connection is as follows:

C#

object Can consist of a link or a channel.

number The telephone number of the remote ISDN device. If no telephone number is entered, the router calls the number configured in the current profile with the set number command. If no number is entered and the current profile has not been configured with a number, this command has no effect.


call

with :

time

bps

ne

le

2 Link

A logical 64/56-kbps data path assigned to users, numbered sequentially beginningone. The unit is limited to two links. The two syntax formats for link are as follows

L# or #

The # parameter can be either 1 or 2.

The three syntax formats for a connection and an associated link are as follows:

C#/L# or C#/# or #/#

3 Channel

Channels provide a physical data path over the WAN. Channels are one or more slots kept in sequence through the WAN that do not require any kind of inverse multiplexing. The unit can support 64-kbps channels or (in INS release only) 128-kchannels. The syntax format for a channel is as follows:

CH#

The # parameter can be 1 or 2.

If no link number is specified, the call is placed on both links. If no destination telephonumber is specified, the unit uses the number configured for the current profile.

ExampleThe following example makes a manual call on the second link to 408 555-1212 whiin profile mode for profile 2503:

Host:2503> call 2 4085551212

Related Commandsset buttonset number


demand

t

ta rate

demandTo specify when an on-demand ISDN call will be made, use the demand command.

DEmand [link] [TH reshold = kbps] [DUration= seconds] [SOurce =WAN | LA n | BOth]

Syntax Description

DefaultChannel 1—threshold 0 duration 1 source lanChannel 2—threshold 48 duration 1 source both

link Specifies the link with which all the following parameters are associated.

TH reshold Minimum data rate (in kbps) that must exist on the channel beforethe call will be made. The range is 0 to 128.1

Inband negotiation traffic (traffic that terminates at the router) is notaken into account for the threshold level.

1 The data rate measured is the data that the router intends to forward across the ISDN line, so the damight actually exceed the physical capacity of the line.

DUration Length of time (in seconds) that the traffic is to be above the data threshold before the call is made. The range is 1 to 255.

SOurce Source of traffic that is counted.

WAN Traffic received from the ISDN line.

LA n Traffic received from the LAN.

BOth The value of LAN or the ISDN traffic, whichever is higher.


demand


Usage GuidelinesOn-demand dialing must be enabled with the set auto command.

ExampleThe following example determines when on-demand dialing will take place for profile2503:

Host:2503> demand 1 threshold 10 duration 2 source lan

This specifies that link 1 will dial if 10 kbps is continuously exceeded for 2 seconds.

Related Commandsset auto set delayset ppp callbackset ppp negotiation retryset ppp negotiation countset ppp bacpset ringbackset timeouttimeoutshow negotiation


disconnect

have

with :

disconnectTo manually terminate an ISDN call, use the disconnect command.

DIsconnect [object | AL l]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe object parameter can take one of these forms:

1 Connection

A logical data stream that connects the unit to the remote device. A connection canmultiple links associated with it. The syntax format for a connection is as follows:

C#

2 Link

A logical 64/56-kbps data path assigned to users, numbered sequentially beginningone. The unit is limited to two links. The two syntax formats for link are as follows

L# or #

The # parameter can be either 1 or 2.

object ISDN B channel or link. Can be 1 or 2. If no channel or link is entered, any connected calls are terminated.

AL l Disconnects all calls.


disconnect

time

bps

d with

The three syntax formats for a connection and an associated link are as follows:

C#/L# or C#/# or #/#

3 Channel

Channels provide a physical data path over the WAN. Channels are one or more slots kept in sequence through the WAN that do not require any kind of inverse multiplexing. The unit can support 64-kbps channels or (in INS release only) 128-kchannels. The syntax format for a channel is as follows:

CH#

The # parameter can be 1 or 2.

The router may automatically reconnect the call after using the disconnect command. This can occur if on-demand dialing is enabled and a telephone number has been enterethe set number command. If the router receives enough packets to meet the demandthreshold parameters, a new call is made.

ExamplesThe following example disconnects a call on the first link:

Host> disconnect 1

The following example disconnects any calls on both links of the current connection:

Host> disconnect

Related Commandset number


establish

fter it Ds and DN

establishTo reassign a released service profile identifier (SPID) to the router, use the establish command.

EStablish [spidid]

Note This command is applicable to US switches only.

Syntax Description

DefaultNone

Command Mode System mode

Usage GuidelinesThis command is applicable only in the United States. It reassigns one of the SPIDs ahas been released to a device other than the router. For example, if you have two SPIthe router is using both of them for data, one of the SPIDs has to be released if an ISphone is to be used.

ExampleThe following example reassigns the SPID ID2 to the router following a release:

establish 2

spidid Specify the number of the SPID you are establishing (1 or 2) as set by the set spid command.


establish

The following is a typical sequence of events:

1 A unit has two calls established.

2 A call is disconnected by the user to free the B channel.

3 User releases the second SPID by entering: REL 2. The message “Terminal Identifier Unassigned” displays.

4 The same SPID is activated by the user in another ISDN TE on the same DSL.

5 Use of the other TE is finished and the user frees the SPID.

6 User reactivates the SPID in the unit by entering: ES 2.

7 A second channel call is made by the user of the unit.

Related Commandrelease


release

a

l per ve to

used

releaseTo release the Layer 2 link and Terminal Identifier (TEI) Unassigned associated withSPID so that it can be used by another device on the same ISDN line (SBus), use the release command.

RElease [spidid]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesUse this command when your ISDN line only supports two SPIDs and one B channeSPID (DMS-100). When released, the SPID still resides in memory, so you do not hareenter the SPID. To reassign the SPID back to the router, use the establish command.

ExampleThe following example releases the Channel 1 SPID from the router so that it can beby another device on the same ISDN line:

Host> release 1

spidid Specify the number of the SPID you are releasing (1 or 2) as set by the set spid command. (North America only.)


release

Related Commandestablish


reset directory number

reset directory numberTo delete one or all of the directory numbers, use the reset directory number command.

REset DI rectorynumber AL l | number [.subaddress]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesIf you reset all of the directory numbers, the RCAPI number is automatically reset.

ExampleTo delete a directory number entered with the set directory number use one of the following commands:

Host> reset di all

Host> reset di 14085559020

AL l Deletes all the directory numbers entered with the set directory number or set phone command.

number Deletes the specified directory number that has been entered with the set directory number or set phone command.

.subaddress Subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line. Can consist of 1 to 10 digits.


reset directory number

Related Commandsset directory numberset phoneset rcapi number


reset phone

e

reset phoneTo disassociate a directory number that has been associated with an interface, use threset phone command.

REset PHONE1 | PHONE2 | DOV

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThis command applies only to routers with analog telephone support.

ExampleTo disassociate a directory number that has been entered with the set phone command:

Host> reset phone1

Related Commandset phone

PHONE1 | PHONE2 The directory number set (and ringing cadence) for each telephone interface will be disassociated.

DOV All of the DOV (Data Over Voice) directory numbers set are disassociated (a maximum of two).


set aoctimeout

of the

set aoctimeoutTo extend the connection (after the idle time out has expired) based on the frequencyAdvise of Charge During Call (AOC-D), use the set aoctimeout command. The feature is also known as the fee pulse mode.

SEt AOctimeout ON [seconds] | OFf

Note This command is applicable only in the NET3 image (Europe).

Syntax Description

Default4 seconds


Usage GuidelinesThe aoctimeout command can only be used in conjunction with the set timeout command. Before using this command, configure the set timeout command parameters, threshold kbps and duration seconds.

ON Enables the action time.

seconds The seconds required to terminate the logical connection. We recommend using the default value. This parameter has a range of 1 to 120 seconds.

OFf Disables the action time.


set aoctimeout

ExampleThe following example enables the use of AOC-D supplemental service:

Host: set aoctimeout on

Related Commandset timeout


set alawvoice

use quire

set alawvoiceTo set voice encoding, use the set alawvoice command.

SEt ALawvoice ON | OFf

Note This command is applicable only in the NET3 image (Europe).

Syntax Description

DefaultOn


Usage GuidelinesFor the NET3 switch type, the set alawvoice command changes the voice encoding to micro-law for countries such as Taiwan. Most countries that use the NET3 switch typeA-law voice encoding. This command is needed for countries (such as Taiwan) that remicro-law.

ExampleThe following example sets voice encoding to A-law:

Host> set alawvoice on

ON Voice encoding is set to A-law.

OFf Voice encoding is set to micro-law (µ-law or Mu-law).


set auto

set autoTo enable or disable on-demand dialing, use the set auto command.

SEt [link] AUto ON | OFf

Syntax Description

Defaultchannel 1—enabled (on)channel 2—enabled (on)


ExampleThe following example disables on-demand dialing for the second channel:

Host> set 2 auto off

Related Commandsdemandset ppp callbackset ppp negotiation retryset ppp negotiation count

link Link on which on-demand dialing is enabled or disabled. Can be set to 1 or 2. If no link is specified, on-demand dialing is enabled or disabled on both links.

ON Enables on-demand dialing.

OFf Disables on-demand dialing.


set auto

set ppp bacpset ringbackset timeoutshow negotiation


set autodetection

d, the h type

itch the re

ter

set autodetection To enable or disable automatic service profile identifiers (SPID) detection, use the set autodetection command.

SEt AUTOD etection ON | OFf

Note This command is available only in the US image.

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesThe auto-SPID and auto-switch detection features simplify the use of ISDN terminal equipment because there are fewer parameters to enter. Before the feature is enableuser only enters the local directory numbers and area code. No SPID number or switcis required. This reduces the possibility of mistakes made by the user or the carrier.

During the detection process, the control software tries to register SPIDs with the swbased on the local directory numbers and area code. After a successful registration,control software stores the detected SPIDs and switch type in NVRAM, as if they weentered by the user.

ON Specifies a North American switch with auto detection enabled. You must enthe directory number, including the area code.

OFf Disables the auto detection feature. You must enter the SPID numbers and switch type.


set autodetection

user and

ESS not

, three p the

table,

hile outer

est

The lete

o 700 . It is d

If auto detection fails to register SPIDs with the ISDN switch, the system prompts the with an error message. The user will be required to manually enter SPID number(s) switch type.

The auto-detection feature only applies to North American ISDN switches, usually a 5Custom, DMS-100 Custom, NI1, or NI2 switch. The auto-detection mechanism mightwork with any other switch, such as Siemens switch.

The user can enter up to six directory numbers in software Release 4.0(1) and higherfor each interface. Including the area code helps the auto detection software speed uregistration process.

The following limitations are inherit in SPID auto detection.

• If the service provider has assigned SPIDs that cannot be generated by the searchthe feature does not work.

• The test call does not work if other router features are attempting to make calls wdetection is in progress. It is recommended that the LAN not be connected to the rwhile detection is in progress.

• You must not attempt to make a voice call while SPID detection is in progress.

• An incoming call can cause the feature to fail or to incorrectly determine that the tcall was successful.

• The detection procedure requires approximately 30 seconds for each table entry.current table size suggests a maximum time of approximately 12 minutes to compthe SPID detection process.

• The SPID detection procedure places a burden on the switch connected to the Ciscseries router. Therefore, the feature disables itself after it has finished the processrecommended that the feature is used only during installation and that it be invokesparingly.

ExampleThe following example disables on-demand dialing for the second channel:

Host> set 1 directorynumber 4085551234Host> set 2 directorynumber 4085552345Host> set autodetection on


set autodetection

Related Commandsset directory numberset spidset switch


set backupnumber

tgoing es not

to data

ally

to

set backupnumberTo set a backup number, use the set backupnumber command.

SEt [link] BackupNUmber = [subaddress]

Syntax Description


Usage GuidelinesCisco 700 series routers can place a call to a backup telephone number when an oucall is made. The call might not be successful because the receiving side is busy or doanswer. Cisco 700 series routers support second number fail-over for manual and aucalls. Both the called number and the backup numbers must be configured.

ExampleThe following example sets up a backup number:

Host> set backupnumber 18885551212


link Logical 64/56-kbps data path assigned to users, numbered sequentibeginning with one. The unit is limited to two links.

BackupNUmber 1 to 20-digit telephone number of a device.

.subaddress Subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line. Can consist of 1 10 digits.


set button (Cisco 770 series routers)

the status

is

set button (Cisco 770 series routers)To make and disconnect data calls, use the set button command.

SEt BUtton STandard | username | OFf

Syntax Description


Usage GuidelinesThis command applies only to Cisco 770 series routers and associates a profile withISDN make and break button. To use this command, choose an existing profile. The of the button is displayed in the output of the show configuration command issued in system mode.

Table 5-2 summarizes the B-channel connection status and the button operation.

STandard Used if no selection was made (the Standard profile telephone number used). If you make more than one choice, the last one will be effective.

OFf Disables the button.

Table 5-2 B-Channel Connection Status and Button Operation

Current Status Button Operation

No calls up Make a data call

1 Data call only Disconnect data call

2 Data calls Disconnect both data calls

1 Voice call only Make a data call

2 Voice calls No action

1 Data call and 1 Voice call Disconnect data call


set button (Cisco 770 series routers)

ExampleThe following example sets the button to use the Standard profile:

Host> set button standard

Related Commandcall


set callwaiting

e or for

set callwaitingTo disable or enable the call waiting, use the set callwaiting command.

SEt CALLW aiting [IN terface=PHONE1 | PHONE2] ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultEnabled


Usage GuidelinesThis command applies only to routers with analog telephone support. If a fax machinmodem is connected to the analog telephone interface PHONE2, disable call waitingPHONE2.

ExampleThe following example disables the call waiting interface on PHONE2:

Host> set callwaiting IN=PHONE2 OFF

PHONE1 | PHONE2 Sets call waiting for each specified telephone interface.

ON Enables call waiting.

OFf Disables call waiting.


set conference

ticular

call:

e.

set conferenceTo change the call conference feature access code, use the set conference command.

SEt CONference = accesscode

Syntax Description

Default60


Usage GuidelinesThis command applies to NI1 and DMS switches only. Feature access codes for a parsupplementary service varies from ISP to ISP. There is no range for these codes.

ExampleThe following example changes the code used by the service provider to activate the

Host> set conference = 66

accesscode Call used by the service provider to activate the call conference featur


set countrygroup

untry

or the ose

ard.

g

set countrygroupTo set the ring cadence duration for the analog telephone equipment for a specific cogroup, use the set countrygroup command.

SEt COUntryGroup groupnumber

Syntax Description

Default1 (North America)


Usage GuidelinesThis command only applies to routers with analog telephone support. Ring cadences fanalog telephone equipment differ for each country. This command allows you to chothe appropriate ring cadence.

Note Refer to the version command to verify the correct analog telephone daughter c

Table 5-3 lists each country group, associated group number, and the associated rincadences.

groupnumber Set a ring cadence for the analog telephone equipment for a specificcountry.


set countrygroup

g

a

ExampleThe following example sets the current country group value to 1. The appropriate rincadence takes effect immediately:

Host> set countrygroup 1

Related Commandversion

Table 5-3 Country Groups and Ring Cadence Duration

Country Group Group Number Ring Cadence

USA, Canada 1 241

1 Underlined value indicates the ring duration in seconds. The numbers that are not underlined indicatesilence.

Australia, Ireland, Singapore, United Kingdom, Malaysia 2 0.40.2 0.42

Austria, Portugal, Sweden 3 15

Belgium 4 13

Denmark, Finland, Germany, Greece, Italy, Luxembourg, Mexico, Netherlands, Norway, Switzerland

5 1 4

Finland, Sweden 6 19

France 7 1.53.5

Hong Kong 8 0.40.2 0,43

Japan, Korea 9 12

Spain 10 1.53


set delay

ling rror t t the

t

me

set delayTo set the time between unsuccessful demand call attempts, use the set delay command.

SEt [link] DElay seconds

Syntax Description

DefaultLink 1—30 secondsLink 2—30 seconds


Usage GuidelinesThe delay time applies to all ISDN demand call attempts.

If the routers at both ends of an ISDN connection are configured with on-demand diaenabled and the same delay time, unsuccessful calls can lead to a nonterminating econdition. This condition occurs when each router repeatedly tries to call the other aexactly the same delay time. Neither call will be successful, and both routers will repeacall attempt at the same delay interval.

link Link to which the delay time applies. If no link is entered, the delay time is sefor both links.

DElay Number of seconds between unsuccessful call attempts. This value can be between 10 and 32767 seconds. Another call is attempted when the delay tihas expired only if the parameters set by the demand command are met.


set delay

ExampleThe following example sets the first channel to retry demand calls every 15 seconds:

Host> set 1 delay 15

Related Commanddemandset backup number


set directorynumber

,

to ix m

set directorynumberTo enter the router directory number, use the set directorynumber command.

SEt [spidid] DIrectorynumber = number [.subaddress]

Note The SPID ID is applicable to U. S. switches only.

Syntax Description

DefaultNo directory number is configured.


Usage GuidelineTo delete a directory number, use the reset directory number command.

spidid The SPID ID can be 1 or 2. Depending on your ISDN service provideryour line might be assigned one or two SPIDs.

If no SPID ID is specified, the directory number is associated with SPID1 in the case of switches with SPIDs.

number The directory number assigned by the telephone company. Can have 220 digits. For Cisco 760 and Cisco 770 series routers, a maximum of sdirectory numbers are allowed. For Cisco 750 series routers, a maximuof two directory numbers are allowed.

.subaddress Subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line. Can have 1 to 10 digits.


set directorynumber

ted

1234

The show voicerouting command confirms the directory numbers are correctly associawith the analog telephone ports. The following example shows the output from the show voicerouting command.

Interface VoicePriority VoicePriority Call Directory RingIn Out Waiting Number Cadence

PHONE1 ALWAYS ALWAYS ON 5551234PHONE2 ALWAYS ALWAYS ON 5551235DOV N/A N/A N/AUNSPECIFIED N/A N/A N/A

ExamplesThe following example (shown in abbreviated form) associates directory number 555with the first SPID and directory number 5551235 with the second SPID.

766> set 1 di 5551234766> set 2 di 5551235

If your BRI line is not assigned SPIDs, use the set directory number command without the spidid argument to configure the router with the directory numbers, for example:

766> set di 5551234

Related Commandreset directory numbershow voicerouting


set internaltones

e the

h.

set internaltonesTo select the tone provided by the switch or the tone generated by the unit locally, usset internaltones command.

SEt INTernaltones None | DIaltone | All

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThis command applies only to European ISDN Net3 and 1TR6 switches.

ExampleHost> set internaltones none

None All tones are provided by the switch.

DIaltone Dialtone is generated locally. All the other tones are provided by the switc

All All the tones are provided locally.


set multidestination

to

set multidestinationTo enable multidestination dialing, use the set multidestination command.

SEt MU ltidestination ON | OFf

Syntax Description



Usage GuidelinesWhen setting multidestination, make sure you are not creating a bridging loop.

ExampleThe following example enables multidestination dialing:

Host> set multidestination on

ON Enables multidestination dialing. The router, through the use of profiles, is ableconnect to multiple remote locations over ISDN.

OFf Disables multidestination dialing. If the router attempts to connect with two different remote routers, the connection to the second router is refused.


set number

e

e 1

n d

be

set numberTo enter the ISDN telephone number that each link calls, use the set number command.

SEt [link] NUmber = [number .subaddress]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo ISDN telephone numbers configured.

Command Mode Profile mode

Usage GuidelinesTo delete a number entered with the set number command, enter the command without thtelephone number.

link The link to which the telephone number is assigned. This number can bor 2. If no link is specified, the number is applied to both links.

number The telephone number called when dialing on demand. The number caconsist of 1 to 32 digits. This number should include all numbers requirefor the router to complete the call (for example, access codes and areacodes).

.subaddress The subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line. The address can1 to 10 digits.


set number

e

ExamplesThe following example sets a telephone number that is automatically dialed for profil2503:

Host:2503> set 1 number 14085551234

The following example deletes the dialed number for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set 1 number

Related Commandsset autoset plan


set permanent

g t and

n any

a

ed.

set permanent Use the set link permanent command to enable permanent connections.

SEt link PErmanent ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesCustomers and Internet service providers (ISPs) in areas served by carriers providinflat-rate ISDN can have their lines connected permanently. This overrides any timeouthreshold parameters. It also allows the flexibility of having one or more channels permanently up.

This feature is not dependent on the switch for permanent connections and can work oswitch type.

On power up, the router tries to bring up all permanent connections. If for any reasonconnection gets disconnected, the router attempts to reconnect.

link Specifies channel 1, channel 2 or D, where the D channel has AO/DI configur

PErmanent Specifies permanent mode of operation.

ON Enables permanent mode.

OFf Disables permanent mode.


set permanent

e up , it

e up nent

ss all the

t other

ttempts

If permanent mode is specified for more than one link on a single profile, all links comonly if Multilink PPP is configured. If the D channel is configured for permanent modecomes up only if no other B channels are active.

If the idling D channel configured for permanent mode is disconnected, it will not comif any B channel is already connected, until the B channel call is discontinued. Permamode can be configured for three links only, two B channels and the D channel, acroprofiles. If you enter this command after having configured it for two B channels and D channel, an error message displays on the console screen.

The permanent mode setting overrides only timeout and threshold parameters and noevents such as

• Manual call disconnects.

• Pressing the make/break switch (Cisco 770 series routers only).

• Overrides from voice priority settings.

These events cause the line to be disconnected, but in permanent mode the router ato restore the line immediately.

Related Commandsshow configurationshow demandunset permanent


set phone

lt

n

,

,

,

set phoneTo select the interface to which the voice calls are routed, use the set phone command.

SEt PHONE1 | PHONE2 | DOV number [.subaddress][ ring1 | ring2 | ring3]

Note This command applies only to routers with analog telephone support.

Syntax Description

PHONE1 PHONE2

The telephone interface to which the voice calls will be routed. If no interface has been associated with an incoming voice call, the defaurouting will be to PHONE1.

DOV (Data Over Voice) If a directory number is associated with the DOV interface, all incoming voice calls to that number will be treated as data over voice calls and routed to the Ethernet interface.

number The directory number associated with that interface. There is one directory number per telephone interface. Two directory numbers cabe assigned to be data over voice.

.subaddress Subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line. This number can have 1 to 10 digits.

ring1 Specifies the ringing cadence. If the ringing cadence is not specifiedthe original country’s tone is generated. Ring 1 signals DRM to routethe incoming call to output port 1.




set phone

tory r is one

n be

nce:

DefaultPHONE1


Usage GuidelinesIf you are connected to a 5ESS Custom switch and you have assigned multiple direcnumbers to a SPID, an incoming voice call destined for a secondary directory numberouted as the primary directory number. As a result, the call is routed to a different phinterface or uses a different ring cadence than expected.

The Distinctive Ringing feature provides up to three distinctive ring cadences that caassigned to directory numbers.

ExampleThe following example sets the telephone interface, directory number, and ring cade

Host> set phone1 6592651 ring1

Related Commandreset phone

Ring Type 1 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off

Ring Type 2 0.8 seconds on, 0.4 seconds off, 0.8 seconds on, 4 seconds off

Ring Type 3 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.8 seconds on, 4 seconds off


set plan

set planTo set the numbering plan for outgoing calls, use the set plan command.

SEt PLan NOrmal | IN ternational | NAtional | SUbscriber | UNknown ISDN | ABbreviated | CEntrex| NEtwork

Syntax Description

DefaultNormal


NOrmal Unknown numbering type with unknown numbering plan (most common case).

IN ternational The international numbering type with ISDN numbering plan.

NAtional The national umbering type with ISDN numbering plan.

SUbscriber Local numbering type with ISDN numbering plan.

UNknown ISDN Unknown numbering type with ISDN numbering plan.

ABbreviated Abbreviated numbering type with private numbering plan.

CEntrex Local numbering type with private numbering plan.

NEtwork Network specific numbering type with private numbering plan.


set plan

aking rm to

aking

Usage GuidelinesThe numbering plan is the type of telephone numbering plan the router uses when mcalls. Numbering plans are predefined settings that configure calls so that they confotelephone system requirements.

ExampleThe following example sets the router to use the international numbering plan when mcalls:

Host> set plan international


set ringback

ack to rent er in code ode ht be

2. .

.

set ringbackTo set the router’s ringback number, use the set ringback command.

SEt [link] RIngback [number [.subaddress]]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo ringback number is configured.

Command ModeProfile level

Usage GuidelinesThe ringback number is the number string used by the remote router to make a callbyour router. If a remote router is calling in from a different area code, requires a diffeaccess codes or a country code, it might be necessary to specify that ringback numbeach profile. For example, the ringback number for a remote router in the same areamight be 555-1234 while the ringback number for a remote router outside the area cmight be 1408555-1234, and the ringback number for a remote router on a PBX mig95551234.

link The ISDN B channel to which the ringback number applies. Can be 1 orIf no channel is specified, the ringback number applies to both channels

number The number sent to the remote router to make a callback to the Cisco router (your local router phone number). Can be 1 to 32 digits. This number must include all the digits necessary for the remote router to complete a call to the Cisco router, for example, area and access codes

.subaddress Specifies a particular device on a multipoint ISDN line. Can be 1 to 10 digits.


set ringback

e

outer.

t e

llback

If BACP or BAP is used, the ringback number has another function; to make a second-channel call, the router uses a combination of the number it used to make thfirst-channel call, and the remote router’s second-channel ringback number.

For example, the Cisco router calls 555-1234 to reach the first channel of the remote rIf the second channel telephone number is 555-5678, set the remote router’s second-channel ringback number to 5678. The Cisco router uses the prefix of the firsnumber it called (555) plus the second channel’s ringback number (5678) to make thsecond call.

ExampleThe following example sets the number that a remote router uses when making a cato the Cisco router on the first ISDN B channel:

Host> set 1 ringback 14155551234

Related Commandsdemandset auto set ppp callbackset ppp negotiation retryset ppp negotiation countset ppp bacpset timeoutshow negotiation


set speed

ges.

e.

set speedTo set the speed of data calls, use the set speed command.

SEt SPeed 56 | 64 | AUto | VOice

Syntax Description

DefaultAuto


Usage GuidelinesThe voice keyword should be used only with ISDN switch types 5ESS, DMS or NI1.

56 Outgoing calls are made and connected at 56 kbps. Incoming calls are connected at 56 kbps.

64 Outgoing calls are made and connected at 64 kbps.

Incoming calls are connected at 64 kbps, unless Bearer Capability (BC) indicates the call is at 56 kbps. In this case, calls are connected at 56 kbps.

AUto Outgoing calls are attempted at 64 kbps. If unsuccessful, the call is retried. Incoming calls are connected at the speed indicated by BC and ISDN messa

VO ice Outgoing calls are made using Voice Bearer Capability (VBC) and data is transferred at 56 kbps. Used for Data Over Voice (DOV). This parameter is used only in the United States. Incoming calls are connected as in auto mod


set speed

ExampleThe following example sets the speed for data calls to 64 kbps for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set speed 64


set spid

.

e

st

set spidTo enter a service profile identifier (SPID), use the set spid command. (North America only.)

SEt [spidid] SPId [spidnumber]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo SPIDs are configured.


Usage GuidelinesTo delete a previously entered SPID, use the set spid command without the SPID numberargument.

ExamplesThe following example sets two SPIDs for the line:

Host> set 1 spid 0408555123401Host> set 2 spid 0405555123402

spidid (Optional if there is only one SPID) Used as a convenient single-digit number to identify the actual long SPIDs allocated by service providers

spidnumber Number identifying the service to which you have subscribed. This valuis assigned by the ISDN service provider and is usually a ten-digit telephone number with some extra digits. The SPID number can consiof 1 to 20 digits.


set spid

The following example deletes the first SPID:

Host> set 1 spid

Related Commandsreleaseestablishshow configuration


set switch

ta

ata

.)

,

set switchTo configure the central office switch, use the set switch command.

SEt SWitch 5Ess | DMS | NI-1 | INS | VN3 | NET3 | 1TR6 | TPH | PERM64 | PERM128 | PERM2X64

Syntax Description

5Ess 5ESS

DMS Northern Telecom DMS-100

NI1 National ISDN-1

INS Japan—NTT’s Information Network System

VN3 France—ISDN BRI standard

NET3 Europe—ISDN BRI standard

1TR6 Germany—ISDN BRI standard

TPH Australia

PERM64 Dedicated line service that enables the unit to use a single 64-kbps dastream connected to one port. With this option, Channel 1 runs at 64 kbps, and Channel 2 is not used. NTT’s Super Digital service is an example of a leased line server. (Japan)

PERM128 Dedicated line service that enables the unit to use a single 128-kbps dstream connected to one port. With this option, Channel 1 and 2 are combine to run at 128 kbps. (An example is Japan NTT’s HSD service

PERM2X64 Bundles the B channels even if they are not synchronized. (When the unit is set in PERM128 mode, only one PPP session runs at 128 kbpsand both B channels must be synchronized.)


set switch

or

n the

to the h the

both f they

DefaultThe switch type depends on which image of the Cisco IOS-700 software is loaded. Fexample, if your image is c760-in.b-US.41-1, the default is 5ESS.


Usage GuidelinesNot all switch settings are available to all users. The switch type available depends otype of software loaded into the unit.

perm2x64 enables the router to use both of the 64-kbps data streams for connecting remote end. In this mode, the B channels are bundled together to total 128 kbps, withelp of Multilink PPP (MLP).

When the unit is set in PERM128 mode, only one PPP session runs at 128 kbps andB channels must be synchronized. PERM2X64 mode bundles the B channels even iare not synchronized.

ExampleThe following example configures the ISDN switch type as DMS:

Host> set switch dms


set timeout

the

s for

set timeoutTo configure the amount of time the ISDN line remains idle before disconnecting, useset timeout command. This command sets the same parameter as the timeout duration command.

SEt [link] TIME out [seconds | OFf]

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


ExampleThe following example configures both ISDN B channels to disconnect after 5 minuteprofile 2503:

Host:2503> set 1 timeout 300Host:2503> set 2 timeout 300

link The ISDN link to which the timeout parameters apply.

seconds Time (in seconds) that the ISDN line will remain idle before disconnecting. Can be between 1 and 32767 seconds.

OFf The ISDN line will not disconnect automatically.


set timeout

Related Commandsdemandset aoctimeoutset auto set ppp callbackset ppp negotiation retryset ppp negotiation countset ppp bacpset ringbacktimeoutshow negotiation


set transfer

call:

set transferTo change the call conference feature access code, use the set transfer command.

SEt TRansfer = accesscode

Syntax Description

Default9


Usage GuidelinesThis command applies to NI1 and DMS switches only.

ExampleThe following example changes the code used by the service provider to activate the

Host> set transfer = 67

accesscode Call used by the service provider to activate the call transfer feature.


set voicepriority

m

it

n

set voicepriorityThe set voicepriority command sets the voice priority mode. It determines if the systewill disconnect a B channel assigned to a data call to allow a voice call.

SEt VOicepriority [IN coming | OUtgoing] [IN terface=PHONE1| PHONE2] AL ways | COnditional | NEver

Syntax Description

DefaultAlways


INcoming Priorities are being set for incoming calls.

OUtgoing Priorities are being set for outgoing calls.

IN terface Takes the values of PHONE1 or PHONE2. When neither is specified, will apply to both PHONE1 and PHONE2.

AL ways Sets voicepriority to be active under all circumstances. Data calls are always bumped for voice calls.

COnditional Sets voicepriority to disconnect data calls only if the network connectiocan be guaranteed (that is only if there are two data calls to the same destination).

NEver Disables voicepriority; data calls are never bumped for voice calls.


set voicepriority

s for

Usage GuidelinesVoice priority can be set in a variety of ways. Table 5-4 lists the settings and the modeinbound calls.

Table 5-4 lists the settings and the modes for outbound calls.

Table 5-4 Inbound Voice Priority Modes

Inbound Calls

Mode 2 data channels destination A

1 data channel to destination A, 1 data channel to destination B

1 data channel to destination A, but the offered channel is the one in use

Always Bump 1 data channel when inbound call is answered by going off-hook

Bump 1 data channel when inbound call is answered by going off-hook

Bump data call when inbound is answered

Conditional Bump 1 data channel when inbound call is answered by going off-hook

No bump; ring busy No bump; ring busy

Never No bump; ring busy No bump; ring busy No bump; ring busy

Table 5-5 Outbound Voice Priority Modes

Outbound Calls

Mode 2 data calls to destination A

1 data call to destination A and 1 data call to destination B

1 data call to destination A, but the telephone’s channel is the one in use

Always Bump 1 data call when the telephone goes off-hook

Bump 1 data call when the telephone goes off-hook

Bump the existing dataphone when the call goes off-hook


set voicepriority

ExampleThe following example configures voice priority for incoming calls on both telephone interfaces to conditional mode:

Host> set voicepriority conditional

Conditional Bump 1 data call when the telephone goes off-hook

No bump; ring busy No bump; ring busy

Never No bump; ring busy No bump; ring busy No bump; ring busy

Table 5-5 Outbound Voice Priority Modes (continued)

Outbound Calls


show status

show status To display the current status of the ISDN line and both B channels, use the show status command.

SHow STatus


ExampleThe following example shows output from the show status command:

Host> show statusStatusLine Status

Line ActivatedTerminal Identifier Assigned

Port Status Interface Connection LinkCh:1 56K Call In Progress Data 71Ch:2 64K Call In Progress Phone1


show voicerouting

show voiceroutingTo display the current settings of voice call routing, use the show voicerouting command.

SHow VOicerouting

Note This command applies only to routers with analog telephone support.


ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show voicerouting command:

Host> show voiceroutingInterface VoicePriority VoicePriority Call Directory Ring

In Out Waiting Number CadencePHONE1 AlWAYS CONDITIONAL ON 6592651 1

6592655 26592667 3

PHONE2 ALWAYS CONDITIONAL OFF 6592661 16592663 26592665 3

DOV N/A N/A N/AUNSPECIFIED N/A N/A N/A


timeout

timeout To configure the parameters that specify when the ISDN line will be disconnected, usethe timeout command. This is an expanded version of the set timeout command, which only allows you to specify duration.

TI meout link [TH reshold= kbps] [DUration= seconds] [SOurce= WAn | LA n | BOth]

Syntax Description

DefaultChannel 1—threshold 0, duration off, source lanChannel 2—threshold 48, duration off, source both


link The link to which the timeout parameters apply.

TH reshold Data rate in kbps. If the data rate falls below the specified threshold for the specified duration, the ISDN line disconnects.

DUration Length of time, in seconds, that the traffic must be below the threshold before the ISDN line is disconnected.

SOurce Source of the traffic in reference to the threshold.

WA n Timeout parameters apply to packets received from the ISDN line.

LA n Timeout parameters apply to packets received from the LAN.

BOth Timeout parameters apply to packets received from the interface thathas the most traffic, LAN or ISDN.


timeout

data

Usage GuidelinesIf the set timeout command is configured to off, this command does not apply.

ExampleThe following example configures the router to disconnect the second channel if the rate from either the LAN or the ISDN line falls below 64 kbps for 60 seconds:

Host:2503> timeout 2 threshold 48 duration 60 source both

Related Commandset timeout


unset permanent

se the

unset permanent To disable permanent connections and restore the parameters in the System profile, uunset link permanent command.

UNSEt link PErmanent

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Related Commandsset permanentshow demand

link The link to which the parameter applies.


C H A P T E R

IP Command

6

IP Commands
, such
table he

This chapter describes the commands used to configure Internet Protocol (IP) routingas IP static routes, Routing Information Protocol (RIP), and IP filters.

RIP sends information about your router to other routers. Each entry in a RIP routing provides a variety of information, including the ultimate destination, the next hop on tway to that destination, and a metric.

You can use filters in data collection, display, and analysis.

s 6-1

reset dhcp address

reset dhcp addressTo reset a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) address, use the reset dhcp address command.

REset DHcp ADdress [ipaddress | AL l]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone

Command ModeSystem mode or profile mode

ExamplesThe following example resets a specific DHCP address:

Host:2503> reset dhcp address 10.0.0.3

The following example resets all DHCP addresses:

Host:2503> reset dhcp address all

ipaddress Clears the leased time with this IP address, which was assigned by the router when the DHCP client requested it. The database mapping table is reset. However, the client can ask for the same IP address. The sameIP address is assigned if it is not already assigned to another device.

AL l All lease lines are cleared.


reset dhcp address

Related Commandsset dhcp set dhcp addressset dhcp dns set dhcp gatewayset dhcp netmaskset dhcp wins show dhcp config

IP Commands 6-3

reset ip filter

:

reset ip filterTo delete an IP filter entered with the set ip filter command, use the reset ip filter command.

REset IP FI lter filterid | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExamplesThe following example deletes an IP filter with identification number 8 for profile 2503

Host:2503> reset ip filter 8

The following example deletes all IP filters for profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset ip filter all

Related Commandset ip filter

filterid Clears the IP filter with this identification number, which was assigned by therouter when the filter was created.

AL l Clears all IP filters.


reset ip route

l

reset ip routeTo delete an IP static route, use the reset ip route command.

REset IP ROUTE AL l | DEstination | network [/bits] [GAteway nexthop]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example deletes a static route for profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset ip route destination 250.250.250.1 gateway 150.150.150.1

Related Commandset ip route

AL l Deletes all static routes.

DEstination IP address in four-part dotted decimal format of the network or host to which the packet is being sent.

/bits Number of network bits in the destination network IP address, counting from the left.

GAteway nexthop

IP address of the static route default gateway in four-part dotted decimaformat.

IP Commands 6-5

reset ip pat porthandler

reset ip pat porthandlerTo disable a Port Address Translation (PAT) porthandler, use the reset ip pat porthandler command.

REset IP PAt POrthandler port_number | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesUse this command to remove a specific porthandler or all porthandlers.

ExampleThe following example disables all PAT porthandlers:

Host:2503> reset ip pat po all

Related Commandset ip pat porthandler

port_number A decimal port number.

AL l Disables all assigned porthandlers.


set dhcp

ent,

led DHCP ore NT)

ified

set dhcpTo enable the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server or DHCP relay aguse the set dhcp command.

SEt DHcp [SErver | RElay ipaddress | OFf]

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesA limited DHCP server implementation is provided. When this server function is enaband configured, it assigns and manages IP addresses from a specified address pool toclients. The options supported by this server are sufficient for Windows 95 clients. If mIP addresses or options are required, a commercial DHCP server (such as Windowsshould be used.

The router relays DHCP requests and responses between DHCP clients and a specDHCP server. Use the set dhcp relayipaddress command, where the IP address is the address of the server to which DHCP requests are forwarded.

SErver Serves the DHCP requests from the client directly.

RElay Relays the DHCP request to the specified DHCP server.

ipaddress IP address of a DHCP server, where Cisco 700 series routers relay sending and receiving packets.

OFf Disables the DHCP server and relay agent.

IP Commands 6-7

set dhcp

ult IP ess

ask

.

.

The set dhcp server command enables the DHCP server with the following options:

If the DHCP server is enabled and there are no DHCP parameters configured, a defaaddress x is chosen. This is the LAN or Internal profile IP address if the default IP addris not zero, or 10.0.0.1 if it is zero.

The following parameters are set:

• DHCP primary gateway = x

• DHCP netmask = native mask from x

• DHCP address pool: start-addr = x+1, count = 128 or a value limited by subnet mand x

set dhcp address start_addr count

The range of address to be assigned to DHCP clients, where start_addr is the starting IP address and count is the number of addresses (from 1 to 256) to be assigned(The default starting address is 10.0.0.2, with 10.0.0.1 assigned to the router.)

set dhcp netmask nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

The subnet mask of the DHCP clients.

set dhcp gateway primary | secondary ip_address

The default gateway for the DHCP clients.

set dhcp dns primary | secondary ip_address

The Domain Name System (DNS) for the DHCP clients

set dhcp wins primary | secondary ip_address

The WINS servers for the DHCP clients.

reset dhcp domain string The domain string for the DHCP clients.

set dhcp address ip_address | all

Removes the lease of an IP address. If all is specified, all the leases are cleared.

show dhcp config The current DHCP Server or Relay Agent configuration details.


set dhcp

IP routing is turned on for the LAN profile.

ExampleThe following example turns on the DHCP server:

Host> set dhcp server

Related Commandsreset dhcp set dhcp addressset dhcp dns set dhcp gatewayset dhcp netmaskset dhcp wins show dhcp config

IP Commands 6-9

set dhcp address

HCP

ult IP

P

set dhcp address To set the range of addresses (or address pool) to be used by the DHCP server for Dclients, use the set dhcp address command.

SEt DHcp ADdress ipaddress count | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultDependent on the DHCP parameters configured.


Usage GuidelinesIf the DHCP server is enabled and there are no DHCP parameters configured, a defaaddress pool with starting ipaddress as the LAN or Internal profile’s IP (if not zero) + 1 or10.0.0.2. will be set. The count will be the minimum of 128 or the value limited by theand netmask.

To reset this value to the default value, enter:

Host> set dhcp address 0.0.0.0 128

ipaddress The starting address of the pool. To delete the address pool, use 0.0.0.0. for the ipaddress.

count The number of IP addresses in the pool. The maximum number of Iaddresses is 254 or the number of hosts available in the specified subnet. If the subnet exceeds 254, the table ranges from the start address to the first 254 addresses on the subnet.

AL l Removes all the leases of the IP addresses.


set dhcp address

.2.1.

ExampleThe following is an example of a DHCP address pool. The DHCP address is 192.165The count is 10.

Host> set dhcp address 192.165.2.1 10

Related Commandsreset dhcp set dhcp set dhcp dns set dhcp gatewayset dhcp netmaskset dhcp wins show dhcp config

IP Commands 6-11

set dhcp dns

r

set dhcp dnsTo set the Domain Name System (DNS) server address for DHCP clients, use the set dhcp dns command.

SEt DHcp DNs PRimary | SEcondary serveraddrress

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesTo delete the DHCP DNS address, use 0.0.0.0 as the server address. The primary osecondary DNS can be set using the set dhcp dns command.

ExampleThe following example configures the DHCP DNS server address:

Host> set dhcp DNS primary 150.150.10.47 Host> set dhcp DNS secondary 150.150.10.17

PRimary Primary DNS server address.

SEcondary Secondary DNS server address.

serveraddress DNS server address in four-part dotted decimal format.


set dhcp dns

Related Commandsreset dhcp set dhcp set dhcp addressset dhcp dns set dhcp gatewayset dhcp netmaskset dhcp wins show dhcp config

IP Commands 6-13

set dhcp domain

set dhcp domainTo specify the domain string for DHCP clients, use the set dhcp domain command.

SEt DHcp DOmain [string]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following is an example of a DHCP domain string:

Host> set dhcp domain cisco.com

Related Commandsreset dhcp set dhcp set dhcp addressset dhcp dns set dhcp gatewayset dhcp netmaskset dhcp wins show dhcp config

string Domain string. To delete the domain name, use the null string () or leave thefield blank.


set dhcp gateway

ult

ternal

set dhcp gatewayTo specify the default gateway address for DHCP clients, use the set dhcp gateway command.

SEt DHcp GAteway PRimary | SEcondary ipaddress

Syntax Description

DefaultIf the DHCP server is enabled and there are no DHCP parameters configured, a defavalue of the LAN or Internal profile’s IP (if non-zero) or 10.0.0.1 will be set.


Usage GuidelinesMake sure the primary gateway address matches with the IP address of the LAN or Inprofile (whichever is configured) for proper operation.

ExampleThe following example configures a DHCP gateway:

Host> set dhcp gateway primary 140.140.11.17Host> set dhcp gateway secondary 140.140.11.18

PRimary Primary DNS server address.

SEcondary Secondary DNS server address.

ipaddress Primary or secondary gateway address. To delete the gateway, use 0.0.0.0. for the IP address.

IP Commands 6-15

set dhcp gateway

Related Commandsreset dhcp set dhcp set dhcp addressset dhcp dns set dhcp netmaskset dhcp wins show dhcp config


set dhcp leasetime

00 (The

twork. d use pool ket

lient

set dhcp leasetimeTo set the IP address lease time, use the set dhcp leasetime command.

SEt DHcp LEasetime minutes

Syntax Description

Default0 minutes (a lease time of infinity)


Usage GuidelinesWith software Release 4.2(2), the lease-time value can be set to 0 or from 60 to 710minutes. When the least time is set to 0, the lease time is infinite (the default value). system time must be set accurately for the lease time feature to function properly.)

When a DHCP client needs an IP address, it sends a DHCP request packet to the neThe request packet can include the duration (lease time) during which the client woulthe IP address. The router, acting as a DHCP server, allocates IP addresses from its(depending on availability). The lease time allocated to the client in the response pacdepends on the lease time set on the router.

For example, a router with a lease time set to infinite (default) responds to a DHCP crequest as follows:

• Requests for lease time of 50 minutes get a lease time of infinity.

• Requests for a lease time of 75000 minutes get a lease time of infinity.

minutes A range from 60 to 71000 minutes (approximately 50 days) or 0 (infinite).

IP Commands 6-17

set dhcp leasetime

quest

• Requests for a lease time of 1000 minutes get a lease time of 1000 minutes.

• Requests without a specified lease time get a lease time of infinity.

A router with a lease time set to a value of 100 minutes responds to a DHCP client reas follows:

• Requests for a lease time of 50 get a lease time of 100 minutes.

• Requests for a lease time of 75000 minutes gets a lease time of 100 minutes.

• Requests for a lease time of 1000 get a lease time of 1000 minutes.

• Requests without a specified lease time get a lease time of 100 minutes.

ExampleThe following example sets the lease time to 60 minutes:

Host> set dhcp leasetime 60

Related Commandshow dhcp config


set dhcp netbiosscope

lement

that

set dhcp netbiosscopeTo add a character string value to the NetBIOS name, use the set dhcp netbios_scope command.

SEt DHcp NETBIOS_Scope [scopeid]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage Guidelines NetBIOS Scope, also known as TCP/IP Scope, adds a second element to the single-eNetBIOS computer name. The scope ID is a character string value appended to the NetBIOS name and is used for all NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) communications from computer. The character string can be multipart, and it is a limited method of creatingisolated subnets based on NetBIOS names, using an extension to the name.

ExampleThe following example adds a character string to the NetBIOS computer name:

Host> set dhcp netbios_scope cntrl

Related Commandshow dhcp config

scopeid A character string to be appended to the NetBIOS name.

IP Commands 6-19

set dhcp netmask

ult

s

set dhcp netmaskTo set the subnet mask for DHCP clients, use the set dhcp netmask command.

SEt DHcp NEtmask nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Syntax Description

DefaultIf the DHCP server is enabled and there are no DHCP parameters configured, a defavalue of the LAN or Internal profile’s netmask or 255.0.0.0 is set.


Usage Guidelines Make sure the DHCP subnet mask matches the LAN or Internal profiles (whichever iconfigured) for proper operation.

ExampleThe following example configures a DHCP subnet mask:

Host> set dhcp netmask 255.255.255.0

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Subnet mask for the DHCP clients. Use a 32-bit quantity in four-part dotted decimal format.


set dhcp netmask

Related Commandsreset dhcp set dhcp set dhcp addressset dhcp dns set dhcp gatewayset dhcp wins show dhcp config

IP Commands 6-21

set dhcp wins

set dhcp winsTo specify the WINS server for DHCP clients, use the set dhcp wins command.

SEt DHcp WI ns PRimary | SEcondary serveraddress

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example specifies a WINS server for a DHCP client:

host> set dhcp wins primary 140.10.6.5host> set dhcp wins secondary 140.10.6.6

PRimary Primary DHCP WINS server address.

SEcondary Secondary DHCP WINS server address.

serveraddress IP address of the primary or secondary WINS server. To delete the WINS server, use 0.0.0.0 for the IP address.


set dhcp wins

Related Commandsreset dhcp set dhcp set dhcp addressset dhcp dns set dhcp gatewayset dhcp netmaskshow dhcp config

IP Commands 6-23

set gateway

e

tion:

.

set gatewayTo set a static default route pointing at the router profile’s connection interface, use thset gateway command.

SEt GAteway ipaddress

Syntax Description

Default0.0.0.0


ExampleThe following example configures a default static route to the Internal profile’s connec

Host> set gateway 150.150.10.10

ipaddress IP address of the profile’s interface in four-part dotted decimal format


set ip address

he ess.

set ip addressTo set the IP address for any interface, use the set ip address command.

SEt IP ADdress ipaddress

Syntax Description

Default0.0.0.0


ExampleThe following example configures the user-defined profile 2503 connection with an IPaddress:

Host:2503> set ip address 150.150.10.17

ipaddress IP address for the interface in four-part dotted decimal format. To delete tIP address of an interface, use this command with 0.0.0.0 as the IP addr

IP Commands 6-25

set ip cost

n.

set ip costTo set the cost metric to the next destination, use the set ip cost command.

SEt IP COst value

Syntax Description

DefaultThe default cost value is 1.


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command while in profile mode applies the cost to that profile connectioEntering this command in system mode applies the cost to the Internal profile.

ExampleThe following example configures profile 2503 with a cost parameter of 2:

Host:2503> set ip cost 2

value Number of routers between this router and the destination network.


set ip filter

d.

set ip filter To create an IP filter, use the set ip filter command.

SEt IP FI lter [[type] IN | OUt [SOurce = [NOT] address] [DEstination= [NOT] address]] | [IN | OUt [patternname]^8] [BLock | ACcept | DEmand | IGnore]

Syntax Description

type One of the following keywords corresponding to an IP packet type:

icmp—Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets.

icmpxrd—ICMP packets, except redirect packets.

icmprd—ICMP redirect packets.

tcp—Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packets.

tcpsyn—TCP SYN (connection establishment) packets.

tcpxsyn—TCP packets, except SYN.

udp—User Datagram Packets.

If no packet type is specified, the filter is applied to all IP packets.

IN Filters on incoming packets to a profile.

OUt Filters on outgoing packets to a profile.

SOurce address

Applies filters only to packets sourced from this address.

Using the source not address keyword applies the filter to any packet that is not from the IP address specified in the command.

DEstination address

Applies filters to all packets destined for this address.

Using the destination not address keyword applies the filter to any packet that is not destined for the IP address specified in the comman

IP Commands 6-27

set ip filter

in

e

d

is

d

on

.

eep

t et

address IP address is entered in the following format:

ipaddress [/bits ] [ :loport ] [+ | –] [hiport ]

ipaddress—The source or destination IP address. Use a 32-bit quantity four-part dotted decimal format, for example 10.1.1.0.

/bits—The number of significant bits in the IP address, counting from thleft, for example, Class C = 24 bits or 255.255.255.0.

low-port—The lowest port number matched by the filter.

If followed by a plus sign (+), all ports greater than this port are matcheby the filter.

If followed by a minus (–), all ports between this port and the high portare matched by the filter.

hiport—The highest port number matched by the filter.

Low port and high port arguments can only be used if the packet type set to tcp or udp.

patternname The pattern value is 6 bytes, a maximum of 8 patterns are allowed, anthe patterns should be set by the set pattern command before using this command. When defining a pattern filter with the set pattern command, the reference points of each pattern should be iphdr, tcphdr, udphdr, tcpdata, or udpdata. Using this field excludes the source and destinatifields.

BLock Prevents the packets defined in the filter from being sent on to the connection.

ACcept Allows the packets defined in the filter to be sent on to the connection

DEmand Packets that match the filter are counted in the threshold values that kthe WAN connected or bring it up if it is down.

IGnore Packets matching the filter are not counted in the threshold values thakeep the WAN connected. If the WAN is not up when the ignored packis received, the packet is dropped; otherwise the packet is forwarded.


set ip filter

g byte

any

n.

he

r

is

DefaultNo IP filters are configured.


Usage GuidelinesIP filters can be created based on the source address, destination address, or existinpatterns set by the set pattern command. Entering this command while in profile mode applies the IP filter to that profile connection. Entering this command in system modeapplies the IP filter to the Internal profile.

When IP filter is set with type TCP and port 21 (FTP), the FTP session fails becauseTCP packet with a destination port other than 21 is filtered.

To ensure the FTP session is successful, do not specify the FTP port; for example:

host> set ip filter TCP out destination a.b.c.d/32:21 accept

Refer to the “Port Assignments and NetBIOS Names” appendix for further informatio

The maximum offset a byte pattern can have is 255 bytes from the reference point.

The maximum number of patterns that can be specified is 20.

Packets that do not match any filters are processed as follows:

• If any one of the filters is set to accept, a packet that does not match at least one of tfilters is blocked.

• If all the filters are set to block, a packet that does not match any filter is accepted.

• If any one of the filters is set to demand, a packet that does not match a demand filteis ignored.

• If any one of the filters is set to ignore, a packet that does not match an ignore filter treated as demand.

IP Commands 6-29

set ip filter

red

N if filter, ked.

the tches e d.

ExamplesAn incoming packet addressed to TCP port 25 is accepted:

Host:2503> set ip filter tcp in source= 198.95.216.125:25 accept

An incoming TCP packet, where the TCP data portion is the start width of the patterndefined by tcppat1, is blocked:

Host:2503> set ip filter in tcppat1 block

An outgoing TCP packet addressed to port 23 is blocked:

Host:2503> set pat1 pattern 00 17 offset 2 from TCPHDRHost:2503> set ip filter out pat1 block

The following example demonstrates the packet filtering process. A packet is compawith filter statements until it matches a filter or until all the filters have been tested.

system:2503> set ip filter out tcppat1 acceptsystem:2503> set ip filter out udppat1 blocksystem:2503> set ip filter out udppat2 accept

If the packet matches the first filter, it is accepted and forwarded (bringing up the WAnecessary). If it matches the second filter, the packet is blocked. If it matches the third it is accepted and forwarded. If the packet does not match any of the filters, it is bloc

In the following example, if an outgoing packet matches the first filter, it is counted inthreshold values and forwarded (bringing up the WAN if necessary). If it matches thesecond filter, the packet is ignored with regards to the threshold values. If a packet mathe third filter, it is demanded, the WAN is brought up, the packet is forwarded, and ththreshold value increments. If the packet does not match any of the filters, it is ignore

system:2503> set ip filter out tcppat1 demandsystem:2503> set ip filter out udppat1 ignoresystem:2503> set ip filter out udppat2 demand


set ip filter

et

In the following example, an outgoing packet is compared with each filter. If the packdoes not match any of the filters, it is blocked and ignored because an accept filter isdefined.

system:2503> set ip filter out tcppat1 acceptsystem:2503> set ip filter out udppat1 blocksystem:2503> set ip filter out udppat2 demandsystem:2503> set ip filter out tcppat2 ignore

In the following example, an outgoing packet that does not match any of the filters isaccepted and ignored because there is one demand filter defined.

system:2503> set ip filter out tcppat1 blocksystem:2503> set ip filter out udppat1 demandsystem:2503> set ip filter out udppat2 ignore

Related Commandsreset ip filterset patternshow filtershow pattern

IP Commands 6-31

set ip framing

tocol s not ddress ot

set ip framingTo set the type of encapsulation used for IP packets, use the set ip framing command.

SEt IP FRaming EThernet_II | NOne

DefaultEthernet_II for 3.xNone for 4.x user-defined profilesEthernet_II for 4.x LAN and Internal profiles


Syntax Description

Usage GuidelinesThe router can be assigned an IP address from the remote device using Internet ProControl Protocol (IPCP) address negotiation. It supports IPCP options 1 and 3. (It doesupport option 2, TCP/IP Header Compression.) IP unnumbered is supported. IPCP anegotiation is on by default in any profile configured for IP routing. This feature does nsupport assigning addresses to remote devices.

ExampleThe following example configures profile 2503 for Ethernet II packet framing:

Host:2503> set ip framing ethernet

EThernet_II Sets packet framing to the standard IEEE Ethernet_II frame encapsulation.

NOne Sets packet framing to Internet Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP). Usethis keyword when using Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).


set ip multicast

st urned

and are e a ctive

e ts the

set ip multicastTo enable IP multicast forwarding, use the set ip multicast command.

SEt IP MU lticast ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultMulticast forwarding will be turned off.


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command while in a particular profile enables the forwarding of multicapackets received from that interface to all the other interfaces that have IP multicast ton.

For IP multicast, the Cisco IOS-700 software does not support IGMP (Internet GroupMembership Protocol), PIM (Protocol Independence Multicast), or DVMRP (DistanceVector Multicast Routing Protocol) protocols. It recognizes only the multicast packetsforwards them to all active interfaces. However, as a router, the Cisco IOS-700 softwdecrements the TTL (time to live) of multicast packets. Most IP multicast packets havTTL of 1, which results in dropping these packets before they are forwarded to other ainterfaces.

To overcome this limitation, it is recommended that the Multicast application generatpackets with TTL values greater than 1. When the Cisco IOS-700 software decremenTTL, it remains a positive value to be forwarded to other interfaces.

ON Enable multicast.

OFf Disable multicast.

IP Commands 6-33

set netbios name spoofing

INS router es not hen INS

cheme

er if

set netbios name spoofingTo enable or disable spoofing for NetBIOS, use the set netbios name spoofing command. Spoofing prevents unnecessary NetBIOS name query request packets from being transmitted across the ISDN line.

SEt NETBI os Name Spoofing minutes | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesWhen a user turns on NetBIOS name spoofing on the outgoing user profile for the Wserver, and a local WINS client sends a NetBIOS name query request packet, if the has the answer to the query, it replies by sending a response packet. If the router dohave the answer to the query, the request is forwarded to the remote WINS server. Wthe answer comes back from the WINS server, it forwards the response to the local Wclient.

The router keeps a database of up to 100 NetBIOS name entries and has an aging sfor out-of-date name entries. The aging timeout is 4 hours for each entry.

minutes Sets NetBIOS name spoofing for an ISDN connection for a specified numbof minutes. The range is 1 to 32,000 minutes. For an idle ISDN connection,spoofing is already turned on, the spoofing time is reset to the number of minutes specified. If spoofing is turned off, spoofing does not start until the ISDN line is brought up.

OFf Disables NetBIOS name spoofing.


set netbios name spoofing

3:

ExampleThe following example enables NetBIOS name spoofing for 1 hour on the profile 250

Host:2503> set netbios name spoofing 60

Related Commandsset ip configshow netbios name spoofing

IP Commands 6-35

set ip netmask

n to the

set ip netmaskTo set the subnet mask for an interface, use the set ip netmask command. To delete the subnet mask for an interface, enter this command with 0.0.0.0 as the subnet node.

SEt IP NEtmask mask

Syntax Description

Default0.0.0.0


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command while in profile mode applies the IP netmask to the connectiocreated for that user. Entering this command in system mode applies the IP netmaskInternal profile.

ExampleThe following example configures the subnet mask for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ip netmask 255.255.255.0

Related Commandset subnet mask

mask Subnet mask for the profile interface. Use a 32-bit quantity in four-part dotted decimal format.


set ip pat

set ip patTo enable or disable IP Port Address Translation (PAT), use the set ip pat command.

SEt IP PAt ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesThe set ip pat command turns IP update off and propagate on. PAT cannot be turned on at an internal, standard, or LAN profile for software Release 4.0(1). When PAT is turnedon, the maximum number of user profiles is two.

ExampleThe following example disables PAT:

Host:2503> set ip pat off

Related Commandshow ip pat

ON PAT is enabled and will reset and flush the PAT internal tables.

OFf PAT is disabled.

IP Commands 6-37

set ip pat porthandler

pt

set ip pat porthandlerTo set up the PAT port handler for a decimal port number, use the set ip pat porthandler command.

SEt IP PAt POrthandler DEfault | TE lnet | FTp | SMtp | WI ns | HT tp | portnumber ipaddress | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


DEfault The IP addresses specified are the default handlers for all ports, exceports specifically assigned a handler. Use the show ip pat command to show the current assignments.

TE lnet Telnet protocol port 23.

FTp File Transport Protocol (FTP) protocol port 21.

SMtp Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) protocol port 25.

WI ns NetBIOS session service port 139.

HT tp World Wide Web - HTTP and secure HTTP port 80,443.

portnumber The TCP/UDP port numbers in decimal.

ipaddress Local unregistered IP address.



d from ally d for ndler outer

nicate h a . ated tically

ed by

ions

is not

there

ide

k.

not

Usage GuidelinesThe port handler maps a public port to a private IP address. When a packet is receivethe outside, Port Address Translation (PAT) compares the port number with an internconfigured port handler list (15 entries, maximum), and if there is a port handler definethis port, it routes the packet to the appropriate port handler. If there is a default port hadefined, it routes the packet there. If it fails to find entries for the above two cases, the ritself handles the packet.

The PAT feature enables local hosts with designated private IP addresses to commuwith the outside world. The router translates the source address of the IP header witsingle, global, unique IP address before the packet is forwarded to the outside worldLikewise, IP packets on the return path go through address translations to the designprivate IP addresses. When PAT is enabled, the transmission of RIP packets is automadisabled to prevent leaking private IP addresses to the outside world.

This system mode command sets up a port handler for one of the IP applications definthe mnemonics or for a decimal port number defined by port_number. For example, to define the port 21 (decimal) service handler (for private IP address 10.1.3.1), use set ip pat porthandler 21 10.1.3.1.

To undefine the port handler, use set ip pat porthandler 10.1.3.1off.

There is a limit of 15 entries for this command.

Since PAT takes away the end-to-end significance of an IP address, there are limitatwhen PAT is enabled:

• PING from an outside host to a host in the private network ends at the router and forwarded to the inside host.

• Telnet from an outside host to a host in the private network also ends at the router ifis no telnet port handler defined.

• Only one inside or private WWW server is supported. WWW linkages with other inshosts or servers are not translated.

• Only one FTP server, Telnet server and so forth is supported in the inside networ

• Packets destined for the router itself, such as DHCP, SNMP, PING, and TFTP, aresubject to the PAT.

IP Commands 6-39


12 not

P tbios

FTP on the

• A maximum of 12 PCs can simultaneously boot in the inside network. If more thanPCs try to boot up simultaneously, one or more can get the error message about being able to access the server.

• 400 PAT entries are allocated for sharing among the inside machines. If TCP connections are set up, and TCP timeouts are set to keep alive, no more than 400machines can get to the outside world.

• The Cisco 700 PAT feature does not handle fragmented FTP packets.

• Multidestination with unnumbered links does not work for PAT and is not recommended.

• Some well-known ports cannot have port handlers defined. They include the DHCclient port, used by the router in getting DHCP server responses, and the WINS neports, used by Inside Windows 95 PCs to get WINS information.

ExampleThe following example is the PAT configuration used to translate traffic to and from an server with IP address 10.0.0.3 and a Web server with IP address 10.0.0.5 that resideprivate LAN:

(System Level)Host> set system 760Host> set user remote

(User Profile)760:remote> set active remote760:remote> set ip routing on760:remote> set ip pat on760:remote> cd

(System Level)Host> set ip pat porthandler ftp 10.0.0.3 Host> set ip pat porthandler http 10.0.0.5

Related Commandsshow ip patset ip pat


set ip pat tcptimeout

e the

e e

set ip pat tcptimeout To set the timeout value for port usage over Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), usset ip pat tcptimeout command.

SEt IP PAt TCptimeout minutes

Syntax Description

Default30 minutes


ExampleThe following example sets the TCP timeout for 60 minutes:

Host:2503> set ip pat tcptimeout 60


minutes Timeout value for TCP port usage. If the port is idle for the time selected, thconnection is terminated. If there is activity on the port before the end of thtimeout, the clock is reset to zero and restarts.

IP Commands 6-41

set ip pat udptimeout

he

set ip pat udptimeout To set the timeout value for the port usage over User Datagram Protocol (UDP), use tset ip pat udptimeout command.

SEt IP PAt UDPTimeout minutes

Syntax Description

Default5 minutes


ExampleThe following example sets the UDP timeout for 10 minutes:

Host:2503> set ip pat udptimeout 10


minutes The timeout value for the UDP port usage. If the port is idle for the time selected, the connection is terminated. If there is activity on the port beforethe end of the timeout, the clock is reset to zero and restarts.


set ip propagate

ion

file’s ters to

set ip propagateTo set whether a route over the Ethernet interface is propagated in Routing InformatProtocol (RIP) broadcast messages, use the set ip propagate command.

SEt IP PROpagate ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOn


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command in profile mode applies the IP propagate parameters to that proconnection. Entering this command in system mode applies the IP propagate paramethe Internal profile.

ExampleThe following example configures any route over the profile 2503 connection to be propagated in RIP broadcast messages:

Host:2503> set ip propagate on

ON Routes over the profile interface are propagated in RIP broadcast messageswhenever the connection is active.

OFf Routes over the profile interface are not be propagated in RIP broadcast messages.

IP Commands 6-43

set ip rip receive

file’s ters to

ts:

set ip rip receiveTo set whether Routing Information Protocol (RIP) packets are received, use the set ip rip receive command.

SEt IP RI p REceive BOth | V1 | V2 | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command in profile mode applies the RIP receive parameters to that proconnection. Entering this command in system mode applies the RIP receive paramethe Internal profile.

ExampleThe following example configures the connection for profile 2503 to block RIP packe

Host:2503> set ip rip receive off

BOth Both versions 1 and 2 packets will be received.

V1 RIP version 1 packet will be received.

V2 RIP version 2 packet will be received.

OFf RIP packets will not be received on the profile’s interface.


set ip rip snapshot client

values

other ure

).

g

set ip rip snapshot client To set up the snapshot client parameters for a given profile, use the set ip rip snapshot client command.

SEt IP RI p SNapshot Cl ient ACtive minutes QUiet minutes UPdate ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command sets the client snapshot parameters for a given profile. These are used when the set ip rip update command is set to snapshot.

To set up IP or IPX to use snapshot routing, configure one device as a client and theas a server, and the two devices can communicate through the ISDN WAN. To configthe router as an IP snapshot client, use the set ip rip snapshot client active x quiet y update on command (x is the active time in minutes and y is the quiet time in minutes

ACtive minutes The duration in minutes for the active period when routing informationis exchanged or the quiet period when no routing information is exchanged. Range is from 1 to 70,000 minutes.

UPdate ON Configures the client to send routing information as soon as it entersthe active period.

UPdate OFf Configures the client to wait for the periodic update to send the routininformation after it enters the active period.

IP Commands 6-45


ctive

that

state

up to

rs the

the

ce. tay in

tes are havior

client oes lient,

state.

d

If update is turned on, the router sends an IP RIP packet as soon as the client enters astate and without waiting for the 30-second clock.

To configure a router as an IP snapshot server, use the set ip rip snapshot server active z update on command (z is the active time in minutes). Normally, you set z equal to x sothe client and server have the same active time.

Once both devices are configured and you reboot them, the client enters a pre-activeafter 3 minutes. The 3-minute delay allows the WAN data stack to be initialized.

During the pre-active time, if update is on the client sends a RIP packet immediately. Otherwise, it sends a RIP packet at the regular 30-second interval. The router waits 1 minute for a RIP packet from the server. If no rip packet is received, it repeats this send-RIP-packet-and-wait procedure three times, for a total of 3 minutes. Then it enteactive state. If a RIP packet is received from the server, it enters the active state immediately. This is done to synchronize the start of active time for both the client andserver. So it is better to configure both with the same active time and update on.

During the active time, both the client and server behave as if the command is set toperiodic. RIP packets are exchanged every 30 seconds and aging of routes takes plaAfter the active time expires, both the client and server enter a post-active state and sthis state for 3 minutes. During post-active state, no RIP packets are sent and no rouaged. After the 3 minutes, the client and server enter the quiet state, and the same beas in the post-active state occurs: no RIP packet and no aging.

At the end of quiet time, the client enters pre-active time and the cycle is repeated; thegoes through pre-active, active, post-active, quiet process. The server is passive; it gthrough active, post-active, and stays in quiet until it receives a RIP packet from the cand then it enters the active state.

Remember that there is an initial 3-minute delay before the client enters the pre-activeIf you set the active time to x minutes, the active time used is x+1 minutes, to synchronize with Cisco IOS.

You can use the show ip rip snapshot command to show your snapshot configuration anmonitor the state of the client or server.



ent ing

Example The following example shows the configuration of the profile user 1 as a snapshot clithat has an active period of 10 minutes, a quiet period of 60 minutes, and sends routinformation as soon as it enters the active period.

Host> cd user1Host:user1> set ip rip snapshot client act 10 quiet 60 update on

Related Commandset ip rip update

IP Commands 6-47

set ip rip snapshot server

values

s

set ip rip snapshot server To set the snapshot server parameters for a given profile, use the set ip rip snapshot server command.

SEt IP RI p SNapshot SErver ACtive minutes UPdate ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command sets the server snapshot parameters for a given profile. Thesewill be used when the set ip rip update command is set to snapshot.

ACtive minutes Number of minutes for the active period when routing information is exchanged. Range is from 1 to 70,000 minutes.

UPdate ON Configures the server to send routing information as soon as it enterthe active period.

UPdate OFf Configures the server to wait for the periodic update to send the routing information after it enters the active period.


set ip rip snapshot server

rver nds

ExampleThe following example shows the configuration of the profile user 1 as a snapshot sethat has an active period of 10 minutes and a quiet period of 60 minutes, and that serouting information as soon as it enters the active period:

Host> cd user1Host:user1> set ip rip snapshot server active 10 update on

Related Commandset ip rip update

IP Commands 6-49

set ip rip summarization

ired

ies to

sed

set ip rip summarizationTo enable IP RIP route summarization, use the set ip rip summarization command.

SEt IP RI p SUmmarization AUto | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesRoute summarization is provided on IP RIP Version 2 (only Version 2 provides the requsubnet mask information).

Example The following example shows route summarization set to be across classful boundara single route based on the classful boundary:

Host> cd user1Host> cd user1 set ip rip summarization auto

AUto Routes across classful boundaries will be summarization to a single route baon the classful boundary.

OFf Disables router summarization. The router will use the normal RIP version 2 routes with Variable Length Subnet Mask (VLSM).


set ip rip time

e

set ip rip timeTo change the IP RIP time, use the set ip rip time command.

SEt IP RIP TIme seconds

Syntax Description

Default30 seconds


Usage GuidelinesIf two RIP timers are on, updates are sent at alternate intervals with a period of half thinterval between them. The remaining RIP timers (timeout, hold-down, and flush) arecalculated relative to the RIP update timer.

ExampleThe following example sets the interval to 120 seconds:

Host> set ip rip time 120

Related Commandshow ip rip time

seconds Any value between 1 and 4294967 seconds.

IP Commands 6-51

set ip rip update

the

a to

tive

ns,

t

his

curs

set ip rip updateTo specify that Routing Information Protocol (RIP) packets will be sent at 5-minute intervals, use the set ip rip update command.

SEt IP RIp UPdate PEriodic | DEmand | SNapshot | LI nkup | TRiggered | OFf

Syntax Description

PEriodic RIP packets are sent both periodically and whenever there is a change inRIP table. Use this keyword in the LAN profile to pass RIP information tothe LAN at regular intervals.

DEmand RIP packets are sent both when the ISDN line first connects and when change occurs in the RIP table. Use this keyword for WAN connections avoid bringing up the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) line unnecessarily.

SNapshot The two periods for routing updates are quiet and active. During the acperiod routing updates or exchanges are in a normal process, over a particular interface. Once the active period expires, the quiet period begiand the routing table is frozen in that state. There is no activity until the quiet period expires.

LI nkup RIP packets are sent if the link is up. Use this for WAN connections to avoid bringing up the ISDN line unnecessarily. The RIP packets are senwhen a connection is established and every 30 seconds as long as the connection exists. If the connection does not exist, no RIP data is sent. Tprevents the line from being brought up by RIP packets sent in periodic updates.

TRiggered RIP packets are sent when the link is brought up and when a change ocin the RIP table.

OFf RIP packets are not sent.


set ip rip update

t

he IP long as

nts the

nt he gh an 91,

face. acket,

an nd

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command while in profile mode applies the IP update parameters to thaprofile’s connection. Entering this command in system mode applies the IP update parameters to the Internal profile.

The IP RIP Update Linkup option for IP RIP enables better interoperability between trouter and Cisco IOS. If the IP RIP update is set to link up for a WAN profile, the IP Rdata is sent as soon as a connection is established and again every 30 seconds for asthe connection exists. If the connection does not exist, no RIP data is sent. This preveline from being brought up by RIP packets where the update is periodic.

The set ip rip command includes a triggered option, for triggered updates. Prior to software Release 4.3(1), RIP updates contained the entire routing table and were seperiodically using a large amount of bandwidth over low-speed lines, such as dial-upinterfaces and connection-oriented, packet-switched networks such as X.25. Using tTriggered extension to RIP, the router exchanges only the changed information throuincremental update, saving both bandwidth and CPU time. For triggered RIP to workproperly, the peer router must also be configured for triggered RIP. (Refer to RFC 20Triggered Extension to RIP to Support Demand Circuits for additional information.)

This feature does not support Netware RIP or Netware service access point (SAP).

The neighboring router must also support Triggered extensions to IP RIP on its interWhen Triggered RIP is enabled and the neighboring router does not respond to the pthe router stops sending triggered updates.

If Triggered RIP is enabled at the system level, it is applied to the Internal profile.

The show ip conf all command shows the current routing table with Triggered RIP as entry under the TX heading. Routes learned through Triggered RIP do not age out adisplay an age value of 0 in the output of the show ip route all command.

IP Commands 6-53

set ip rip update

ExampleThe following example configures profile 2503 for sending RIP packets on demand:

Host:2503> set ip rip update demand

Related Commandsshow ip confshow ip route


set ip rip version

set ip rip versionTo specify which version of IP RIP (1 or 2) packets is used, use the set ip rip version command.

SEt IP RIp VE rsion 1 | 2 | BOth

Syntax Description

DefaultRIP version 1 packets


ExampleThe following example configures profile 2503 to send RIP Version 2 packets:

Host:2503> set ip rip version 2


1 Sends RIP Version 1 packets.

2 Sends RIP Version 2 packets.

BOth Sends both Version 1 and 2 packets.

IP Commands 6-55

set ip route

k

set ip routeTo define a static IP route, use the command set ip route.

SEt IP ROUTE DEstination network [/bits] GAteway nexthop [PRopagate ON | OFf] [COst value]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo static routes are defined.


ExampleThe following example configures a static IP route for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ip route destination 198.95.217.0/24 gateway 198.95.217.1 propagate on cost 2

DEstination network Static route destination network address.

bits Number of network bits in the destination address, counting from the left. This information will be propagated only if RIP Version 2 is being used for RIP broadcasts.

GAteway nexthop IP address of the router that receives the packet for this networor host.

PRopagate ON | OFf Whether or not the static route defined by this command will bepropagated in RIP packets.

COst value Cost metric for the route.


set ip route

Related Commandreset ip route

IP Commands 6-57

set ip routing

he

set ip routingTo enable or disable IP routing, use the set ip routing command.

SEt IP ROuting ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesAny profile that has IP routing enabled must have a network address assigned using tset ip address command.

ExampleThe following example enables IP routing for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ip routing on

Related Commandset ip address

ON Enables IP routing on the profile interface.

OFf Disables IP routing on the profile interface.


set subnet

t

ce. le.

set subnet To set the subnet mask for an interface, use the set subnet command. To delete the subnemask for an interface, use this command with 0.0.0.0 as the IP address mask.

SEt SUBnet ipaddressmask

Syntax Description

Default0.0.0.0


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command in profile mode applies the subnet mask to that profile interfaEntering this command in system mode applies the subnet mask to the Internal profi

ExampleThe following example configures the subnet mask for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set subnet 255.255.255.0

Related Commandset ip netmask

ipaddressmask Subnet mask for the profile interface. Use a 32-bit quantity in four-part dotted decimal format.

IP Commands 6-59

show dhcp config

se

show dhcp configTo display the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) configuration settings, uthe show dhcp config command.

SHow DHcp COnfig

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example shows the DHCP configuration with an infinite (0) lease time:

Host> show dhcp configEnvironment

DHCP Server ONDHCP Relay OFF

IP Address PoolStart IP Address 10.0.0.2Count 128Lease Time (minutes) Infinite

Subnet Mask 255.0.0.0DNS Configuration

Primary DNS Server NONESecondary DNS Server NONEDomain ""

GatewaysPrimary Gateway 10.0.0.1Secondary Gateway NONE

WINS ConfigurationPrimary WINS Server NONESecondary WINS Server NONENetBios ScopeId ""


show dhcp config

Address In UseIP Address Mac Address Lease Expiration10.0.0.2 00a0c9931954 Infinite10.0.0.3 00a0c993191f Infinite

2 IP addresses allocated, 126 free

The following example shows the DHCP configuration with 60-minute lease time:

Host> show dhcp configEnvironment

DHCP Server ONDHCP Relay OFF

IP Address PoolStart IP Address 10.0.0.2Count 128Lease Time (minutes) 60

Subnet Mask 255.0.0.0DNS Configuration

Primary DNS Server NONESecondary DNS Server NONEDomain ""

GatewaysPrimary Gateway 10.0.0.1Secondary Gateway NONE

WINS ConfigurationPrimary WINS Server NONESecondary WINS Server NONENetBios ScopeId ""

Address In UseIP Address Mac Address Lease Expiration10.0.0.2 00a0c9931954 04/20/1998 15:27:0110.0.0.3 00a0c993191f 04/20/1998 15:26:00

2 IP addresses allocated, 126 free

IP Commands 6-61

show dhcp config

Related Commandsreset dhcp set dhcp set dhcp addressset dhcp dns set dhcp gatewayset dhcp leasetimeset dhcp netmaskset dhcp wins


show ip configuration

se

show ip configurationTo display the IP configuration for one or all profiles, use the show ip configuration command.

SHow IP COnfiguration [AL l]

Syntax Description


Usage GuidelinesUse this command while in profile mode to display the IP configuration for that profile. Uthis command in system mode or with the keyword all to display the IP configurations for all profiles.

Example The following example shows the output of the show ip configuration command for profile 2503:

Host:2503> show ip config allProfile Routing Frame IP Address Netmask RIP TX RX Prop Co------------------------------------------------------------------------LAN ON ETH2 153.50.6.27 255.255.255.128 V2 PER V2 ON 13274 ON IPCP 1.1.1.2 255.0.0.0 V2 PER V2 ON 1gold ON IPCP 128.16.32.13 255.255.255.252 V2 DEM V2 ON 1silver ON IPCP 15.16.193.6 255.255.248.0 V2 DEM V2 ON 1copper ON IPCP 144.254.4.1 255.255.252.0 V2 DEM V2 ON 1brass ON IPCP 131.108.2.160 255.255.255.0 V2 DEM V2 ON 1

AL l Displays the IP configuration for all profiles.

IP Commands 6-63


Profile PAT Multicast Summarization Netbios Spoofing/Left(min)-------------------------------------------------------------------LAN OFF OFF AUTO OFF /03274 OFF OFF AUTO 30 /0gold OFF OFF AUTO 150 /0silver OFF OFF AUTO 10 /0copper OFF OFF AUTO 20 /0brass OFF OFF AUTO OFF /0


Table 6-1 Show IP Configuration Field Descriptions

Field Description

Profile Profile that is displayed. In profile mode, this field displays the name of the profile.

Routing Indicates if IP routing is enabled for the profile.

Frame IP framing type used for the profile.

IP Address IP address for the connection.

Netmask IP netmask (subnet mask) used for the connection.

RIP RIP version packets used for the profile.

TX RIP update used for the profile—Off, Demand, Periodic, linkup, or triggered.

RX RIP receive configuration for the profile.

Prop RIP propagate configuration for the profile—On or Off.

Cost Cost metric of the route.

PAT IP port address translation—On or Off.

Multicast Status of the multicast feature—On or Off.

Summarization Status of the summarization feature.

NetBIOS Length of spoofing period.

Spoofing/Left Minutes remaining in the spoofing period.



Related Commandsset userset ip routingset ip framingset ip addressset ip netmaskset subnet maskset ip rip versionset ip rip updateset ip rip receiveset ip propagateset ip costset netbios name

IP Commands 6-65

show ip filter

and

show ip filterTo display the IP filters for one or all profiles, use the show ip filter command.

SHow IP FI lter [AL l]

Syntax Description


Usage GuidelinesUse this command in profile mode to display IP filters for that profile. Use this commin system mode or with the keyword all to display IP filters for all profiles.

ExampleThe following is a example of the show ip filter command for profile 2503:

Host:2503> show ip filter allIP Type FilterProfile ID Dir Type Action Addresses---------------------------------------------------ios1 1 IN TCP BLOCK SRC 150.150.150.1/24IOS700 1 OUT UDP BLOCK SRC 171.69.2.91/32

DST 172.22.17.215/32

IP Generic FilterProfile ID Dir Type Action Patterns-------------------------------------------------------IOS700 2 OUT TCPDATA BLOCK SRC 150.150.150.1/24ios2 1 IN UDPHDR ACCEPT SRC 172.22.17.215/32


AL l Displays IP filters for all profiles.


show ip filter

Related Commandset ip filter

Table 6-2 Show IP Filter Field Descriptions

Field Description


ID The identification number assigned by the router when the filter is created.

Type Packet type to which the filter applies. If no packet type is specified in the filter, IP is displayed.

Action Indicates the action to be taken for packets that match the filter (block or accept).

Addresses Destination and/or source addresses of the packets to which the filter applies.

Patterns Pattern name to which the IP generic filter refers.

IP Commands 6-67

show ip pat

show ip patTo display the IP Port Address Translation (PAT) statistics and the currently active translated sessions, use the show ip pat command.

SHow IP PAt

Syntax DescriptionThis command has no keywords or arguments.


ExampleThe following is a example of the show ip pat command:

Host> show ip pat

Port Handler Service-------------------------------------0 10.1.1.1 DEFAULT23 Router TELNET67 Router DHCP Server68 Router DHCP Client69 Router TFTP80 Router HTTP161 Router SNMP162 Router SNMP-TRAP520 Router RIP


show ip rip snapshot

show ip rip snapshotTo display the current snapshot parameters, use the show ip rip snapshot command.

SHow IP RIp SNapshot [AL l]

Syntax Description


ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show ip rip snapshot command:

Host> show ip rip snapshot

Profile Snapshot Active Quiet Update State-------------------------------------------------------------------LAN NONE 0 0 OFF3274 SERVER 5 0 ON ACTIVEgold CLIENT 5 3 ON QUIETsilver NONE 0 0 OFFcopper NONE 0 0 OFFbrass NONE 0 0 OFF

Table 6-3 describes snapshot parameters field descriptions.

AL l Displays current snapshot parameters for all profiles.

Table 6-3 Snapshot Parameters Field Descriptions

Field Description

Profile The profile to which the parameters apply.

Snapshot Specifies whether snapshot is Off (none) or is acting as a client or a server for this connection.

Active The active period in minutes.

IP Commands 6-69

show ip rip snapshot

Quiet The quiet period in minutes.

Update Can be On or Off. Update On configures the client or server to send routing information as soon as it enters the active period. Update Off configures the client or server to wait for the periodic update to send the routing information after it enters the active period.

State There are four states: pre-active, active, post-active, and quiet.

Table 6-3 Snapshot Parameters Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Description


show ip rip time

show ip rip timeTo display the current IP RIP time value, use the show ip rip time command.

SHow IP RIP TI me


ExampleThe following example shows the RIP time in seconds:

Host> show ip rip time Rip Time Limit 120 secs.

Related Commandset ip rip time

IP Commands 6-71

show ip route

and

show ip routeTo display IP routes for one or all profiles, use the show ip route command.

SHow IP ROute [AL l]

Syntax Description


Usage GuidelinesUse this command in profile mode to display IP routes for that profile. Use this commin system mode or with the keyword all to display IP routes for all profiles.

Example The following is a example of the show ip route all command:

Host> show ip route all

Profile Type Destination Bits Gateway Prop Cost Source Age-----------------------------------------------------------JohnS NET 150.150.217.0 24 1.1.1.5 ON 3 RIP 0JohnS NET 150.150.219.0 24 1.1.1.5 ON 3 RIP 0JohnS NET 150.150.216.0 24 1.1.1.5 ON 2 RIP 0JohnS NET 177.3.0.016.0 1.1.1.5 ON 3 RIP 0Internal NET 149.7.0.0 16 DIRECT ON 1 DIRECT 0


AL l Displays IP routes for all profiles.


show ip route


Table 6-4 Show IP Route Field Descriptions

Field Description


Type Interface for the route (either NET or WAN).

Destination Destination network address.

Bits Number of bits in the destination address.

Gateway Local-network gateway for the route.

Propagate Indicates if the route is propagated in RIP packets.

Cost Cost value for the route destination address.

Source Source of information about this route.

Age Number of minutes the route remains in the table without being updated.

IP Commands 6-73

show netbios name

When e

the ets to

al e name tivity

show netbios nameTo display all the NetBIOS names in the router database, use the show netbios name command.

SHow NETBI os NAme


Usage GuidelinesSpoofing prevents unnecessary packets from being transmitted across the ISDN line. a local WINS client sends a NetBIOS name query request packet, if the router has thanswer to the query, the router replies by sending out a response packet in place of server. If the router does not have an answer to the query, it forwards the query packthe WINS server. When the answer to the query comes back, the router forwards theresponse to the client and saves a copy in its local database. The router keeps a locdatabase of up to 100 WINS name entries and has an aging scheme for the out-of-datentries. The entry is aged out of the database after four hours. When NetBIOS namespoofing expires on one profile, the local database is cleared, if no other spoofing acis detected.

ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show netbios name command:

Host> show netbios nameName IP Address Group/Unique--------------------------------------------------user1-pc 0x20 171.69.91.47 Uuser2-pc 0x20 171.69.91.46 Udepartment 1 0x1c 172.88.77.66 G

171.11.22.33171.44.55.66

system1c 0x00 192.22.87.65 U

Total Name: 4


show netbios name


Related Commandsset ipx spoofingset netbios name spoofing

Table 6-5 Show NetBIOS Name Command

Field Description

Name NetBIOS name. The end of the name includes the 16th byte of the name printed as a hex number.

IP Address IP address of the systems that have registered this name.

Group/Unique A unique name or group name.

IP Commands 6-75

show netbios name


C H A P T E R

Novell IPX Command

7

Novell IPX Commands
IPX) This chapter describes the commands used to configure Internet Packet Exchange (
routing, such as IPX static routes, Routing Information Protocol (RIP), and Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) services.

s 7-1

ipxping

SAP . Use

ever,

PX a be is

ipxpingTo determine the status of a specified IPX node, use the ipxping command.

IPxping ADdress net:node | SErver servername

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesIf the servername is used in the ping, and the name cannot be resolved from the local table, the following error message displays: Server name unresolved, try its net:nodethe server IPX address in net:node format instead.

The IPX ping feature allows you to determine if the specified IPX node is alive and reachable. Cisco 700 series routers only generate Novell IPX format ping packets; howthe router responds to both Novell IPX and Cisco IPX ping packets. A response by Cisco 700 series routers to Novell IPX ping packets generates a response in Novell Iformat. A response by Cisco 700 series routers to Cisco IPX ping packets generatesresponse in Cisco IPX format. If a Novell NetWare server is pinged, that server mustrunning IPXPING.NLM to respond to the ping. This NetWare Loadable Module (NLM)part of an IPX Upgrade (IPXRTR.EXE) to NetWare servers.

net:node The IPX address of the node in network node format.

servername Name of the server.


ipxping

ExamplesThe following example illustrates the usage of the ipxping command using the address:

Host> ipxping ad d00000: 40f9babe54

and using an IPX address as its argument:

Host> ipxping se coyote

The netware server name coyote is used as an argument.

Novell IPX Commands 7-3

reset ipx fIlter

r

reset ipx fIlterTo delete an existing IPX filter, use the reset ipx filter command.

REset IPX FI lter filterid | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example deletes an IPX filter with the identification number 8 from user-defined profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset ipx filter 8

The following example deletes all IPX filters from user-defined profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset ipx filter all

Related Commandsset ipx filtershow ipx filter

filterid Clears the IPX filter identified by the number the router used when the filtewas created with the set ipx filter command.

AL l Clears all IPX filters.


reset ipx gateway

reset ipx gatewayTo disable the IPX default route functionality (reset default gateway to none), use the reset ipx gateway command.

REset IPX GA teway

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example disables the IPX default route functionality:

Host> reset ipx gateway

Related Commandset ipx gateway


reset ipx route

n

reset ipx routeTo delete one or all static IPX routes for a profile, use the reset ipx route command.

REset IPX ROute AL l | DEstination=netnum GAteway=net:node

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example deletes all IPX routes for a profile:

Host> reset ipx route all

Related Commandset ipx route

AL l Deletes all static IPX routes for the profile.

DEstination=netnum The destination network number for the static route.

GAteway=net:node The host address of the next router in the path to the destinationetwork.


reset ipx sap helper

reset ipx sap helperTo disable the functionality of IPX SAP helper, use the reset ipx sap helper command.

REset IPX SAp HElper

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesUse this command to reset the address of the IPX SAP helper to none.

ExampleThe following example disables the IPX SAP helper:

Host> reset ipx sap helper


reset ipx service

reset ipx serviceTo delete one or all static IPX service routes for a profile, use the reset ipx service command.

REset IPX SErvice AL l | NAme=service-name TYpe=service-type

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesTable 7-1 lists example service types.

AL l Deletes all static IPX service routes for the profile.

name=service-nameName of the service.

type=service-type Service type of the entry. This is a hexadecimal number.

Table 7-1 Sample IPX SAP Services

Service Type(Hexadecimal) Description

0 All SAP services; IPX defines server type 0 to be an unknown service.

1 User

2 User group

3 Print server queue


reset ipx service

ExampleThe following example deletes all service routes for a profile:

Host:2503> reset ipx service all

4 File server

5 Job server

7 Print server

9 Archive server

A Queue for job servers

21 NAS SNA gateway

2D Time Synchronization VAP

2E Dynamic SAP

47 Advertising print server

4B B trieve VAP 5.0

4C SQL VAP

7A TES—NetWare for VMS

98 NetWare access server

9A Named Pipes server

9E Portable NetWare—UNIX

111 Test server

166 NetWare management (Novell’s Network Management Station [NMS])

26A NetWare management (NMS console)

FFF Wildcard (any SAP service)

Table 7-1 Sample IPX SAP Services (continued)

Service Type(Hexadecimal) Description


set ipx filter

of

set ipx filterTo set an IPX filter, use the set ipx filter command.

SEt IPX FI lter SAp IN put [NAme = ascii string] [TYpe = type range] [SOcket = socket range] ACcept | BLock

Syntax Description

DefaultNo filter configured.


NAme An ASCII string. Wild cards (*) are accepted at the beginning or the end the string.

TYpe Novell IPX service type:

• a-b (from type a to type b)

• a+ (from type a and above)

• a (only type a)

SOcket Novell IPX socket number:

• a-b (from type a to type b)

• a+ (from type a and above)

• a (only type a)

ACcept Service is permitted.

BLock Service is denied.


set ipx filter

of dded ocket r the of the f the

rvice e

Usage GuidelinesCisco 700 series router software Release 4.1(1) and higher only support the filteringincoming SAP response packets. This filtering scheme controls which services are ato the router SAP table. The user can specify filters-per-type range, service name, or srange. Before a service is added to the SAP table, the service type socket number foservice is checked against the existing filters. If the type and socket ranges match anyexisting filters, service is permitted or denied per the specification in the action field ofilter.

If no filter matches the incoming service and any of the filter actions are accept, the seis blocked. The service is accepted only if none of the filters has an accept action. Thmaximum number of SAP filters is limited only by the size of NVRAM.

ExampleThe following example sets the IPX SAP filter in the user-defined profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ipx filter sap input name=*eng type=300+ socket 4000-7fff block

Related Commandsreset ipx filtershow ipx filter


set ipx framing

. d

set ipx framingTo set the frame type used by your IPX network, use the set ipx framing command.

SEt IPX FRaming EThernet_II | 802.3 | 802.2 | SNap | NOne

Syntax Description

DefaultNone (IPXCP)


EThernet_II Sets the IPX framing for Ethernet II type. This is a rarely used, older version of Ethernet.

802.3 Sets the IPX framing for IEEE type 802.3 framing.

802.2 Sets the IPX framing for IEEE type 802.2 framing.

SNap Sets the IPX framing to Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) framingSNAP provides framing between a network entity in the subnetwork ana network entity in the end system. SNAP provides data transfer, connection management, and quality-of-service selection.

NOne Specifies Internetwork Packet Exchange Control Protocol (IPXCP) framing. Use the none keyword when you are connecting two IPX routers that are using Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).


set ipx framing

itted the by the

ls or

Usage GuidelinesFraming is the process of inserting start and stop signals before and after the transmdata. These framing elements delimit the data. They allow the receiver to determine sender timing because the duration of the start bit indicates the bit interval size used sender.

A framing error occurs when the receiver incorrectly identifies the start and stop signathe framing in a transmission.

ExampleThe following example sets the frame type to IPXCP for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ipx framing none


set ipx gateway

n the t route uting

d.

es is

set ipx gatewayTo set the default IPX route, use the set ipx gateway command.

SEt IPX GA teway net:node USer username

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesIPX default routes are supported using the set ipx gateway command. IPX packets are routed to the default gateway if no learned or static route is found for the destination irouting table (assuming a default gateway is set and a connection exists). The defaulis also returned in response to a RIP request if no route for the network is found. IPX romust be turned on for a specific profile for default routing to be activated.

ExampleThe following example sets the IPX gateway route for this host address:

Host> set ipx gateway 00002 : 40f9123456 user 2503

GAteway net:node The host address of the next hop to which packets are forwarde

USer username The profile name. A profile name can be 1 to 8 characters. Namare case sensitive only when displayed. The name of the profileused for the interface connection, through which the packets areforwarded. Can be internal profile, LAN profile, or any existing user profile.


set ipx netbios

ws

set ipx netbiosTo specify whether NetBIOS (Type 20) packets are forwarded on to a profile, use theset ipx netbios command.

SEt IPX NETB ios ACcept | BLock

Syntax Description

DefaultBlock


ExampleThe following example sets the profile 2503 to forward NetBIOS packets to the LAN:

Host:2503> set ipx netbios accept

ACcept NetBIOS packets are forwarded to the LAN. Use the accept keyword when IPX routing is enabled and when using a NetBIOS protocol, such as Windofor Workgroups.

BLock NetBIOS packets are not forwarded to the LAN.


set ipx networkaddress

set ipx networkaddressTo set the IPX network address for a profile connection, use the set ipx networkaddress command.

SEt IPX NETWorkaddress networknumber

Syntax Description

Default0


ExampleThe following example sets the IPX network number for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ipx networkaddress 3AAA

networknumber Number of the IPX network to which this profile connects. This is aneight-digit hexadecimal number that uniquely identifies a network segment. It can be a number in a range of 1 to FFFFFFFD.

A network number of 0 causes the router to attempt to learn the network address from incoming packets.


set ipx rip receive

hat

ts:

set ipx rip receiveTo set whether RIP packets are received, use the set ipx rip receive command.

SEt IPX RI p REceive ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOn (enabled)


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command while in profile mode applies the RIP receive parameters to tprofile connection.

ExampleThe following example configures the connection for profile 2503 to block RIP packe

Host:2503> set ipx rip receive off

ON RIP and SAP packets are received.

OFf RIP and SAP packets are not received on the interface.


set ipx rip snapshot client

ese

g

set ipx rip snapshot client To set up the snapshot client parameters for a given profile, use the set ipx rip snapshot client command.

SEt IPx RI p SNapshot Client ACtive minutes QUiet minutes UPdate ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultNot configured


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command sets up the client snapshot parameters for a given profile. Thvalues are used when the set ipx rip update command is set to snapshot.

ACtive Active period during which routing information is exchanged.

QUiet Quiet period when no routing information is exchanged.

minutes Number of minutes for the active period during which routing information is exchanged or the quiet period when no routing information is exchanged.

UPdate ON Client sends routing information when it enters the active period.

UPdate OFf Client waits until the active period for the periodic update before sendinthe routing information.


set ipx rip snapshot client

that

ExampleThe following example shows the configuration of profile user 1 as a snapshot client has an active period of 10 minutes, a quiet period of 60 minutes, and sends routing information when it enters the active period:

Host> cd user1Host> cd user1 set ipx rip snapshot client act 10 quiet 60 update on

Related Commandset ipx rip update


set ipx rip snapshot server

hese

ive

set ipx rip snapshot server To set up the snapshot server parameters for a given profile, use the set ipx rip snapshot server command.

SEt IPX RI p SNapshot SErver ACtive minutes UPdate ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultNot configured


Usage GuidelinesEntering this command sets up the server snapshot parameters for a given profile. Tvalues are used when the set ipx rip update command is set to snapshot.

ACtiveminutes

The number of minutes of the active period during which routing information is exchanged.

UPdate ON Configures the server to send routing information when it enters the actperiod.

UPdate OFf Configures the server to wait until after it enters the active period for theperiodic update to send the routing information.


set ipx rip snapshot server

r that

ExampleThe following example shows the configuration of profile user 1 as a snapshot servehas an active period of 10 minutes, a quiet period of 60 minutes, and sends routing information when it enters the active period.

Host> cd user1Host> cd user1 set ipx rip snapshot server act 10 update on

Related Commandset ipx rip update


set ipx rip update

col

o

nd N

tive e

set ipx rip updateTo specify when Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and Service Advertisement Proto(SAP) packets will be sent, use the set ipx rip update command.

SEt IPX RIP UPdate=PEriodic | DEmand | SNapshot | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultPeriodic


PEriodic RIP and SAP packets are both sent periodically and whenever there is achange in the RIP or SAP tables. Use this keyword for the LAN profile sthat RIP and SAP information is passed to the LAN at regular intervals.

DEmand RIP and SAP packets are sent both when the ISDN line first connects awhen a change occurs in the RIP or SAP tables. Use this keyword for WAconnections to other Cisco 700 series routers to avoid bringing up the ISDN line unnecessarily.

SNapshot The two periods for routing updates are quiet and active. During the acperiod routing updates or exchanges are in a periodic process. When thactive period expires, the quiet period begins, and the routing table is frozen in that state. There is no activity until the quiet period expires. Snapshot should be used for WAN connections to Cisco routers.

OFf Turns IPX RIP update off.


set ipx rip update

ExampleThe following example disables IPX RIP and SAP packets for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ipx rip update off


set ipx route

ood .0(1)

n

set ipx routeTo enter a static router in a profile RIP table, use the set ipx route command.

SEt IPX ROUTE DEstination=netnum [GA teway net:node] [HOps=hops] [COst=ticks]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo static IPX routes are configured.


Usage GuidelinesTo improve performance, only the services defined in Novell IPX Router Specification107–000029–001 are supported, and a maximum of 400 IPX route entries and 200 gIPX SAPs are allowed. If you need larger route and SAP entries, software Release 4supports set ipx sap helper and set ipx route commands.

DEstination netnum Destination network number in the form of an eight-digit hexadecimal number that uniquely identifies a network cable segment. It can be a number in the range of 1 to FFFFFFFD.

GAteway net:node The host address of the next router to which packets will be forwarded.

HOps Number of routers between this router and the destination network. If this keyword is not used, the default is 1.

COst ticks Number of ticks (one-eighteenth of one second) to the destinationetwork.


set ipx route

ExampleThe following example sets the IPX route to network 150, with four hops between thesource and the destination router:

Host:2503> set ipx route destination 150 gateway 160:0040F90F5623 hops 4

Related Commandset ipx sap helper


set ipx routing

set ipx routingTo enable or disable IPX routing for a profile interface, use the set ipx routing command.

SEt IPX ROUTI ng ON | OFf

Syntax Description



ExampleThe following example enables IPX routing for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ipx routing on

Note If you are routing to the LAN interface, turn routing on in the LAN profile.

ON Enables IPX routing for the profile interface.

OFf Disables IPX routing for the profile interface.


set ipx sap helper

d k

ood hese

set ipx sap helperTo set Service Advertisement Protocol (SAP) helper, use the set ipx sap helper command. The router forwards the Get Nearest Service and Get General SAP request packets to a specific node.

SEt IPX SAp HElper net:node

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesWhen a SAP Helper is set, all the SAP Get Nearest Server service request packets receiveby the router are forwarded to the helper as Unicast packets. The router does not loothrough its own SAP table to try to answer the request.

To improve performance only the services defined in Novell IPX Router Specification107–000029–001 are supported, and a maximum of 400 IPX route entries and 200 gIPX SAPs are allowed in the internal table of the router. Use this command if either of tlimits are exceeded.

ExampleThe following example sets the host address to which a SAP packet is forwarded:

Host> set ipx sap helper 3BBBB:C87965

net:node The host address to which the Get Nearest Service and Get General SAP packets are forwarded.


set ipx sap helper

Related Commandset ipx route


set ipx service

to

ss

s

set ipx serviceTo add a static SAP in the router, use the set ipx service command:

SEt IPX SErvice NAme=service-name TYpe=service-type ADdress=net:node:socket [HOps=hops]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo service routes are configured.

NAme service-nameName of the service destination; a 48-byte object name assignedthe server. The service name combined with the service type uniquely identifies a server on a network.

TYpe service-type Service type of the route; a hexadecimal number. Table 7-1 lists examples of service types.

ADdress net: node:socket

The address of the host on which the service resides. The addremust be in the following format:

• Network—Destination network number in the form of an eight-digit hexadecimal number that uniquely identifies a network segment. It can be a number in the range 1 to FFFFFFFD.

• Node—MAC address of the host or server.

• Socket—The software structure serving as the communicationendpoint on the network device.

HOps Number of routers across which packets will be forwarded whenbeing routed to the service.


set ipx service

,


Usage GuidelinesTable 7-1 lists some example IPX SAP types. For more information about SAP typescontact Novell.

ExampleThe following example enables IPX service for profile 2503:

Host:2503> set ipx service name


set ipx spoofing

across

behalf fing.

ctive

f

set ipx spoofingTo enable or disable spoofing for IPX watchdog packets, use the set ipx spoofing command. Spoofing is used to prevent unnecessary packets from being transmitted the ISDN line.

SEt IPX SPoofing minutes | OFf

Cisco IOS software allows the router to respond to a server's Watchdog requests on of a remote client. This process is called Network Control Protocol (NCP) or IPX spooBenefits of IPX spoofing include:

• Local acknowledgment of queries

• No link responses

• Efficient use of the link

• Minimal operator intervention

When using IPX spoofing, NetWare servers are lead to believe that a session is still awhen it is not. When the number of IPX or SPX sessions are limited, this can cause connectivity problems by denying logins to legitimate users.

Syntax Description



minutes Enables IPX spoofing for an idle ISDN connection for a specified number ominutes. The range is 1 to 32,000 minutes.

OFf Disables IPX spoofing.


set ipx spoofing

Usage GuidelinesIPX routing must be enabled for any profile on which you wish to enable spoofing.

ExampleThe following example enables spoofing for one hour on the profile LAN:

Host:LAN> set ipx spoofing 60

Note IPX routing must be enabled for spoofing to function.

Related Commandset ipx routing


show ipx config

his

show ipx configTo display IPX configurations for one or all profiles, use the show ipx config command.

SHow IPX COnfig [AL l]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesUse this command in profile mode to display IPX configurations for that profile. Use tcommand in system mode to display IPX configurations for all profiles.

ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show ipx config all command:

Host> show ipx config allProfile Routing Frame NetNum Updates RX Spoof(min) NetBios------------------------------------------------------------------6544 ON IPXCP 0 DEMAND ON 0 BLOCKInternal ON 802.3 C0A86400 PERIODIC ON 0 BLOCK

Table 7-2 describes the fields shown.

AL l Displays IPX configurations for all profiles.


show ipx config

hot.

Table 7-2 Show IPX Configuration Field Descriptions

Field Description

Profile Profile with which the IPX configuration is associated.

Routing IPX routing enabled or disabled for the connection.

Frame Ethernet framing type for this profile.

NetNum Network number of the connection.

Updates RIP and SAP updates used for the connection—Off, Demand, Periodic, or Snaps

RX RIP and SAP receive On or Off.

Spoof Spoofing configuration for the connection—Off or number of minutes.

NetBIOS NetBIOS packets blocked or accepted on the connection.


show ipx connections

ode

show ipx connectionsTo display information about all IPX connections, use the show ipx connections command.

SHow IPX CONNections

Syntax DescriptionThis command has no arguments or keywords.

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThis command will display information about all connections when used in system mor in profile mode.

ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show ipx connections command:

2865_66> show ipx connectionsConn #Chan Routing Address InPkts OutPkts InErr OutErr--------------------------------------------------------------------

2 0 ON 0:40F9001859 2139 12532 0 0INT 1 ON C0A86400:40F9001859 17914 141 0 02865_66>



show ipx connections

Table 7-3 Show IPX Connections Field Descriptions

Field Description

Conn Connection number assigned by the router when the connection is established.

#Chan Number of channels used for the connection.

Routing IPX routing enabled or disabled.

Address Network and MAC address of the connection.

InPkts Number of incoming packets.

OutPkts Number of outgoing packets.

InErr Number of incoming packets lost because of errors.

OutErr Number of outgoing packets lost because of errors.


show ipx demand

show ipx demandTo display IPX RIP and SAP packet statistics, use the show ipx demand command.

SHow IPX DEmand


DefaultNone

Usage GuidelinesUse this command in system mode for testing purposes.

ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show ipx demand command:

Host> show ipx demandIPX Demand StatisticsInput Requests 0 Output Requests 3Input Acks 1400 Output Acks 12Input Response Pkts 12 Output Response Pkts 10312Input Fragments 12 Output Fragments 12626Reassembly Retries 1 Reassembly Timeouts 0Retransmit Retries 986 Retransmit Timeouts 112Pkt Too Short 0 Duplicate Fragment 0Bad Fragment Count 0 Bad Fragment Number 0Bad Sequence Number 726 Timer Failure 0


show ipx filter

s

show ipx filterTo show the IPX filters, use the show ipx filter command.

SHow IPX FI lter

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesIn profile mode, this command displays IPX filters for the profile. In system mode, thicommand displays IPX filters for all profiles.

ExampleThe following example shows the IPX filter:

Host> show ipx filterID Function Type Action Addresses------------------------------------------------1 INPUT SAP ACCEPT Type: 1-20 Socket: 451+2 INPUT SAP BLOCK Type: 30

Related Commandsset ipx filterreset ipx filter


show ipx rip snapshot

show ipx rip snapshotTo display the current snapshot parameters, use the show ipx rip snapshot command.

SHow IPX RIp SNapshot [AL l]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show ipx rip snapshot command:

Host> show ipx rip snapshot

Host>Host> show ipx rip snapshotProfile Snapshot Active Quiet Update State-------------------------------------------------------------------LAN NONE 0 0 OFF3274 SERVER 5 0 ON QUIETgold CLIENT 5 3 ON QUIET

Table 7-4 describes snapshot parameters field descriptions.

AL l Displays current snapshot parameters for all profiles.


show ipx rip snapshot

Table 7-4 Snapshot Parameters Field Descriptions

Field Description

Profile The profile to which the parameters apply.

Snapshot Specifies whether snapshot is Off (none) or is acting as a client or a server for this connection.

Active The active period in minutes.

Quiet The quiet period in minutes.

Update Can be On or Off. Update On configures the client or server to send routing information as soon as it enters the active period. Update Off configures the client or server to wait for the periodic update to send the routing information after it enters the active period.

State There are four states: pre-active, active, post-active, and quiet.


show ipx route

show ipx routeTo display the value set for the default IPX routes, use the show ipx route command.

SHow IPX ROute [AL l]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show ipx route command used in systemmode:

Host> show ipx route246 IPX RoutesDestination Gateway Conn Hops Time Flags------------------------------------------------------------

C0A82108 C0A86400:0C61E701 INT 10 17 3C0A821C0 C0A86400:0C61E701 INT 9 17 3

011300 C0A86400:0C61E701 INT 8 11 37240 C0A86400:0C61E701 INT 8 11 37568 C0A86400:0C61E701 INT 8 10 3

960130 C0A86400:0C5FDB01 INT 9 12 3941128 C0A86400:0C5FDB01 INT 11 14 3

7040 C0A86400:0C5FDB01 INT 8 10 37060 C0A86400:0C5FDB01 INT 8 10 37528 C0A86400:0C61E701 INT 8 10 37578 C0A86400:0C61E701 INT 8 10 37560 C0A86400:0C61E701 INT 8 10 3

AL l Displays IPX routing tables for all profiles.


show ipx route

Table 7-5 shows the fields displayed with the show ipx route command.

Table 7-5 Show IPX Route Field Descriptions

Field Description

Destination Route’s destination network address.

Gateway Route’s next hop.

Conn Route’s connection number assigned by the router when the connection is established.

Hops Number of routers to the destination network.

Time Number of ticks to the destination network.

Flags Internal flags (used for troubleshooting).


show ipx service

show ipx serviceTo display IPX SAP information, use the show ipx service command.

SHow IPX SErvice AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesIf the show ipx service command is entered in profile mode, enter all. If the show ipx service command is issued in system mode, do not enter all.

AL l Displays IPX routing service for all profiles.


show ipx service

:

ExampleThe following example is an output from the show ipx service command in system mode

Host> show ipx service all

Type Conn Hops Time Address Name------------------------------------------------------

4 LAN 4 0 AB455F4C:01:0451 ABU-ENG4 LAN 4 0 AB455F4A:01:0451 ABU-BKUP4 LAN 6 0 32595D76:01:0451 ARUN-SVR4 LAN 6 0 2F759A7F:01:0451 CS_LAB_14 LAN 7 0 A12CC033:01:0451 CONE4 LAN 7 0 A12CC034:01:0451 CRIPPEN4 LAN 7 0 960130:01:0451 CASCADE4 LAN 7 0 A12CC016:01:0451 CRASH24 LAN 7 0 ABCD:01:0451 FS34 LAN 7 0 941128:01:0451 FINANCE4 LAN 7 0 101112:01:0451 FS24 LAN 7 0 A12C4800:08002B30948B:0451 GOONEY4 LAN 7 0 931118:01:0451 HOBO4 LAN 8 0 2FB3AA75:01:0451 HRIS4 LAN 7 0 A12C4800:F802517D:0451 HQ4 LAN 6 0 30E9DF65:01:0451 IJLAB41

<Q> and <enter> to Quit or <enter> for MORE

Table 7-6 shows the fields displayed by the show ipx service command.

Table 7-6 Show IPX Service Field Descriptions

Field Description

Type IPX service type.

Conn Connection number (assigned by the router) of the service route.

Hops Number of routers to the service.

Time Time (in ticks) to the service.

Address Network and node address of the service.

Name Service name.


show ipx statistics

show ipx statisticsTo display IPX, IPX RIP, and IPX SAP statistics, use the show ipx statistics command.

SHow IPX STatistics


DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example shows the output from the show ipx statistics command:

Host> show ipx statisticsIPX StatisticsInput Packets Total 20594 Output Packets 13021Packets Forwarded 3 Output Errors 0Packets No Route 364 Bad NetBIOS Packets 0Packets Dropped 636 Packet Hops Exceeded 0Packets Filtered 0 Packets TooShort 0Input Packets: SAP:16183 RIP:2558 IPX:0 SPX:0

NCP:0 NETBIOS:850 IPXWAN:0RIP Input Requests 63 Output Requests 0RIP Input Responses 2384 Output Responses 145RIP Packets Filtered 0 Packets TooShort 0SAP Input Packets 16189 SAP Output Packets 0SAP Packets Filtered 0 SAP Packets TooShort 0SAP Table Entries 154 Lock Failed 0SAP Entries Added 522 Service Down Entries 368SAP Entries Modified 193 Entries Timed Out 0


show ipx statistics


C H A P T E R

Transparent Bridging Command

8

Transparent Bridging Commands

figure
This chapter describes commands such as filtering and address learning used to contransparent bridging.
s 8-1

reset address

table

rs

reset addressTo delete one or all of the manually entered Ethernet addresses stored in the filteringwith the set address command, use the reset address command.

REset ADdress address | AL l

Syntax Description


ExampleThe following example deletes one static address from the profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset address 00000c00755d

Related Commandset address

address Deletes an Ethernet address that has been previously entered with the set address command. Must be entered as 12 contiguous hexadecimal characte(no spaces).

AL l Deletes all Ethernet addresses in the profile that have been entered with the set address command.


reset filter

03:

it

reset filterTo delete one or all user-defined bridge filters, use the reset filter command.

REset [id] FI lter = [AL l]

Syntax Description

Note Use the show filter command to determine filter ID numbers.

DefaultNone


ExamplesThe following example deletes the filter with the identification number 4 from profile 25

Host:2503> reset 4 filter

The following example deletes all filters from profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset filter all

id Deletes filters based on the identification number assigned to the filter whenis created with the set filter command.

AL l Deletes all filters.

Transparent Bridging Commands 8-3

reset filter

Related Commandsset filtershow filter


reset pattern

reset patternTo delete one or all bridge filtering patterns, use the reset pattern command.

REset [patternname] PATtern = [AL l]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExamplesThe following example deletes a pattern called arp from profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset arp pattern

The following example deletes all patterns from profile 2503:

Host:2503> reset pattern all

Related Commandsset pattern

show pattern

patternname Deletes a specific pattern based on the pattern name assigned with theset pattern command.

PATtern AL l Deletes all patterns.


reset type

reset typeTo delete one or all bridge type filters, use the reset type command.

REset TYpe = type | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExamplesThe following example deletes a type filter based on packet type:

Host> reset type 0806

The following example deletes all type filters:

Host> reset type all

Related Commandset type

type Deletes a type filter based on the packet type defined with the set type command. Must be in the form of a four-digit hexadecimal number with no spaces.

AL l Deletes all types of filters.


set address

in a HO)

st rnet

ved

tic

set addressTo add an Ethernet address to a profile’s static address table, use the set address command. This command applies only to bridging.

SEt ADdress = address

Syntax Description

DefaultNo static addresses are configured.


Usage GuidelinesTo delete an address entered with this command, use the reset address command. The Cisco Remote Office (RO) version routers can store up to 1500 Ethernet addresses combination of learned and static addresses. The Cisco Small Office Home Office (SOversion routers can store only four Ethernet addresses.

address Adds the specified Ethernet address to the profile’s static address table. Mube entered as 12 contiguous hexadecimal characters (no spaces). The Etheaddress cannot exist on the same network as the router.

Static addresses are associated with the profile’s connection. Packets receifrom the LAN or ISDN line that contains a static address as a destination address will be forwarded to the connection of the profile containing that staaddress.


set address

ore has

Note Static addresses are stored in nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM). When there is no mNVRAM available, a warning is displayed. A static address entered after this warningbeen displayed is stored in RAM and lost when the router is powered down.

ExampleThe following example adds a static Ethernet address to the profile 2503:

Host:2503> set address 00000c1235ff

Related Commandreset address


set age

the

er one

he

d

set ageTo specify the maximum amount of time that a learned Ethernet address remains in address table, use the set age command.

SEt AGe = seconds | OFf]

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


ExampleThe following example configures the router to delete learned Ethernet addresses afthour of no activity from the address:

Host> set age 60

seconds The time in seconds that any inactive learned Ethernet address remains in taddress table. Must be between 1 and 1,000,000.

When the router receives a packet with a source address matching a learneaddress, the age for that address is reset to 0.

OFf Learned Ethernet addresses remain in the address table indefinitely.


set bridging

ny

set bridgingTo determine what to do with packets that cannot be routed, use the set bridging command.

SEt BRidging ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOn


ExampleThe following example drops packets that cannot be routed:

Host> set bridging off

ON Packet will be bridged based on Media Access Control (MAC) address and aother filters currently active.

OFf Drop packets.


set filter

e a

he

eep

at

set filterTo create a user-defined bridge filter, use the set filter command.

SEt [id] FI lter [patternname] [BLock | ACcept] [DEmand | IGnore]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo filters are configured.


id The filter ID argument is assigned by the router and is not used to creatfilter. It is used to modify existing filter configurations.

patternname A pattern created with the set pattern command. Filters are composed of patterns. This argument can have up to eight pattern names.

If you are using more than one pattern in a filter, all patterns must use tsame (from) value in the set pattern command.

BLock Prevents packets that match the filter from being forwarded to the connection.

ACcept Allows only packets that match the filter to be forwarded to the connection.

DEmand Packets that match the filter are counted in the threshold values that kthe ISDN line connected.

IGnore Packets that match the filter are not counted in the threshold values thkeep the ISDN line connected.


set filter

t in, it ped,

are iated

Usage GuidelinesAlthough multiple filters can be defined as accept, block, demand or ignore, the mosrecently defined filter determines which set of filters is used. When the packet comesis evaluated by the most recent filter. If that filter blocks the packet, the packet is dropeven if another filter would have accepted the packet.

Filters defined in system mode are used by all profiles. Filters defined in profile modeused by that profile only. Filters apply to packets received from the connection assocwith the profile in which the filters are defined.

To display filter IDs, use the show filter command.

ExampleThe following example configures a filter that will be used by all profiles:

Host> set filter arp demand

Related Commandsreset filterset filterset ip filtershow filtershow ip filterset pattern


set learn

tion:

set learnTo enable or disable the Ethernet address learning function, use the set learn command.

SEt LEarn ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOn (Enabled)


Usage GuidelinesThis command applies only when bridging is enabled with the set bridging command.

ExampleThe following example enables Ethernet address learning on the profile 2503 connec

Host:2503> set learn on

Related Commandsset addressset bridgingset mode

ON Enables Ethernet address learning. Addresses are associated with a profile connection and are used for making bridge filtering decisions.

OFf Disables Ethernet address learning. Only addresses entered with the set address command are used to make packet forwarding decisions.


set mode

ured

d

set modeTo configure packet forwarding for bridging, use the set mode command.

SEt [WAN | LAN ] MOde = ANy | ONly

Syntax Description

Defaultswan onlylan any


Usage GuidelinesAddresses are learned either by enabling learning with the set learn command or by entering them manually with the set address command.

Note Broadcast and multicast packets are always forwarded unless filters are configto block them.

WAN Applies the configuration to packets received from the LAN and destined forthe ISDN line.

LAN Applies the configuration to packets received from the ISDN line and destinefor the LAN.

ANy Packets with unknown destination addresses are forwarded to all active connections.

ONly Packets with unknown destination addresses are discarded.


set mode

ExampleThe following example configures the router to forward any packets with unknown destination addresses from the LAN to the ISDN line:

Host> set wan mode any

Related Commandsset addressset learn


set passthru

ugh

set passthruTo configure packet bridging between ISDN connections, use the set passthru command.

SEt PASSThru ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff (Disabled)


ExampleThe following example enables individual remote routers to bridge to each other throthe router:

Host> set passthru on

ON Enables individual remote routers to bridge to each other through the router.

OFf Remote routers can only bridge to devices on the same LAN as the router.


set pattern

l

al

be

set patternTo create a pattern for user-defined bridge filters or IP generic filters, use the set pattern command.

SEt patternname [PAttern = hexpattern binarypattern decimalpattern [OFfset =number] [FRom=BEGINNING | TYPEFIELD | IPHDR | TCPHDR | UDPHDR | TCPDATA | UDPDATA ] PATTERNName = patternname]

Syntax Description

patternname Name of the pattern. Can consist of 1 to 7 characters.

PAttern Value of the pattern. Must be between 1 and 6 bytes, separated by spaces.

hexpattern Bit or byte pattern in hexadecimal format. A wildcard in the form X can be used in place of a digit.

binarypattern Bit or byte pattern in binary format. Will be displayed in hexadecimaformat with the show pattern command. A wildcard in the form X can be used in place of a digit.

decimalpattern Bit or byte pattern in decimal format. Will be displayed in hexadecimformat with the show pattern command.

OFfset number Number of bytes from the pattern reference point that indicate wherethe pattern starts. Must be between 0 and 127. The offset value and the pattern value cannot be more than 128 bytes. If you do not enter a value, defaults to 0.

FRom Pattern reference point, from where the offset value is counted. Canbeginning, typefield, iphdr , tcphdr, udphdr , tcpdata, or udpdata. If you do not enter one, the default is beginning.

BEGINNING The beginning of the packet.

TYPEFIELD The beginning of the packet typefield.


set pattern

DefaultNo patterns are configured.


Usage GuidelinePatterns can be used by all profiles.

ExamplesThe following example creates a pattern test1:

Host> set test1 pattern 00 5a 2c offset 10 from typefield

The following example changes the offset on the pattern test1 to 6 bytes:

Host> set test1 off 6

The following example changes the pattern name from test1 to test2:

Host> set test1 pattern test2

IPHDR The beginning of the IP header.

TCPHDR The beginning of the TCP header.

UDPHDR The beginning of the UDP header.

TCPDATA The beginning of the TCP data.

UDPDATA The beginning of the UDP data.


set pattern

Related Commandsreset patternset filtershow filtershow pattern


set type

d at

in, it ped,

tions

tions

set typeTo create a bridge filter based on packet type, use the set type command.

SEt TYpe=type [ACcept | BLock] [IGnore | DEmand]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo type filters configured.


Usage GuidelinesType filters configured in system mode are used by all profiles. Type filters configurethe profile level are used by that profile only.

Although multiple type filters can be defined as accept, block, demand or ignore, the most recently defined filter determines which set of filters is used. When the packet comesis evaluated by the most recent filter. If that filter blocks the packet, the packet is dropeven if another filter would have accepted the packet.

type Ethernet packet type. Up to four hexadecimal digits with no spaces.

ACcept Only packets with this packet type are forwarded to the connection.

BLock Packets of this type are not sent to the connection.

IGnore Packets of this type are not counted in the demand and timeout calculathat bring the ISDN line up and disconnect it.

DEmand Only packets of this type are counted in the demand and timeout calculathat bring the ISDN line up and disconnect it.


set type

g is nd

ss

m e

t and

By default, type filters apply only to broadcast and multicast packets. If unicast filterinenabled with the set unicastfilter command, type filters apply to broadcast, multicast, aunicast packets.

Type filtering is independent of Ethernet address filtering. Packets must match addrefilters and type filters before being forwarded to or blocked from the ISDN line.

Examples The following example configures profile 2503 to prevent broadcast and multicast froactivating the ISDN line (however, if the ISDN line already connected, the packets arforwarded to the line):

Host:2503> set type 1 acceptHost:2503> set type 1 demand

Because there are no Ethernet packets of type 1, this command blocks all broadcasmulticast traffic.

Refer to the appendix “Ethernet Packet Types” for further information.


set unicastfilter

set unicastfilterTo enable or disable unicast filtering, use the set unicastfilter command.

SEt UNicastfilter ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesUnicast filtering applies to type filters configured with the set type command and to user-defined filters configured with the set filter command.

ExampleThe following example enables unicast filtering for the router:

Host> set unicast on

Related Commandsset typeset filtershow filter

ON Enables unicast filtering.

OFf Disables unicast filtering.


show address

show addressTo display information about the router system and profile address configurations, usethe show address command.

SHow [connection] ADdress

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExamplesThe following example shows the output of the show address command at the system mode:

Host> show addressINT 00 40 f9 12 00 11 StaticLAN 00 a0 24 41 92 fd Age: 72 00 00 1b 4f b2 cc Age: 182 00 00 c0 75 07 4c Age: 1562 6a 6b 1b 4f b2 cc Age: 2162Number of Ethernet Addresses: 5IP Address: 0.0.0.0Ethernet Address: 00 40 f9 12 00 11Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0IPX Default Gateway: NONESAP Helper: NONE

connection When a connection number is specified, the address associated with theconnection is displayed.


show address

when

The following example shows the output of the show address command for the profile 2503:

Host:2503> show address

2 00 40 f9 ff ff ff Static2 00 40 f9 12 34 56 StaticNumber of Ethernet Addresses: 2Ethernet address: 00 40f9 0036 AD

If user profile 2503 has a connection number, entering the show connection address command displays the router profile address configuration.

Table 8-1 describes the fields shown in the display, as well as others that might appearthe command is used.

Table 8-1 Show Address Field Descriptions

Field Description

INT Ethernet address of the internal profile

LAN Ethernet address of the LAN profile

Number of Ethernet addresses

The number of Ethernet addresses associated with the system mode

IP Address IP address of the system mode

Ethernet Address Ethernet address of the router

Subnet Mask Subnet mask of the system mode

Default Gateway Default gateway of the system mode

SAP Helper Service advertising protocol helper


show ethernet

ffic.

show ethernet To generate a performance report of the Ethernet interface, use the show ethernet command. The report provides information on different kinds of errors and interface traThe data in this report has accumulated since the router was last powered up.

SHow ETher

DefaultNone


Example The following example shows output from the show ethernet command:

Host> show ethernetEthernet Statistics:

Multiple Colls: 0Internal Tx Errs: 0Missed Frames: 0Frames Received: 0Frames Sent: 0Octets Received: 0Octets Sent: 0


show filter

file

show filterTo display user-defined filters, use the show filter command.

SHow [id] FI lter

Syntax Description

DefaultNone

Usage GuidelinesIn system mode, this command displays all filters configured in system mode. In promode, this command displays filters configured in system mode and filters defined inprofile mode. This command also indicates whether unicast filtering is enabled.

ExampleThe following example shows output from the show filter command:

Host> show filterUnicast Filtering OFFFilters1 Filter BLOCK arp3 Filter ACCEPT DEMAND john

Related Commandsset filterset unicastfilter

id The ID number assigned to the filter by the router. Displays that filter only, including all patterns that make up the filter.


show pattern

show patternTo display all patterns configured with the set pattern command, use the show pattern command.

SHow [patternname] PATtern

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesPatterns can be used by all profiles.

Example The following example shows output from the show pattern command:

Host> show patternPatternsName Offset From Patternpatta 6 BEGINNING 00 03pattb 0 BEGINNING 08 09pattc 0 BEGINNING 55 66pattd 0 BEGINNING 01 0d6544>

Table 8-2 defines the fields shown in the display.

patternname Displays a specific pattern by the name assigned with the set pattern command.


show pattern

Table 8-2 Show Pattern Field Descriptions

Field Description

Name Name of the pattern.

Offset Number of bytes from the reference point where the pattern starts.

From Lists the pattern starting reference point. Can be BEGINNING or TYPEFIELD, IPHDR, TCPHDR, UDPHDR, TCPDATA, UDPDATA.

Pattern Byte pattern.


show type

pe

show type To display filter types, use the show type command. Ethernet packets contain a 2-byte tyfield that describes the protocol type of the packet.

SHow TY pe


DefaultNone


Example The following example shows output from the show type command:

Host> show typeType forwarding mode ANYType demand mode ANYUnicast Filtering OFF


show type


C H A P T E R

PPP Command

9

PPP Commands

n calls. AP,

nged, evice

ent to

p the crets, 00 en they

This chapter describes the commands to configure Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) parameters, such as call negotiation and authentication.

You can use Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) with Challenge Handshake AuthenticationProtocol (CHAP) or Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) for security and authentication. CHAP and PAP, used with PPP encapsulation (the only encapsulatiomethod used by the Cisco 700 series router), allow routers to authenticate incoming The set ppp authentication command is used to choose the type of authentication, CHPAP or none.

CHAP AuthenticationWith CHAP, a remote device attempting to connect to the router is requested, or challeto respond to the router authentication request. This works both ways. When another dattempts to call the Cisco 700 series router, CHAP information is verified. When the Cisco 700 series router calls another device and is challenged, CHAP information is sthe challenger.

When a router receives the challenge response, it verifies the response by looking uuser name of the remote device in the list of profiles and verifying the passwords or sewhich must be identical on the remote device and the local router. In the Cisco IOS-7software, CHAP passwords are referred to as secrets because they are encrypted whare stored; passwords are stored in plain text.

s 9-1

PAP Authentication

ord

cure. es the

call in er if

In the following example, router 2503 is allowed to call the local router using the passwcisco7:

Host> cd 2503 Host:2305> set ppp authentication CHAPHost:2305> set ppp secret cisco7Host:2305> set ppp clientname 2503

PAP AuthenticationLike CHAP, PAP is an authentication protocol used with PPP. However, PAP is less seCHAP passes an encrypted version of the password on the physical link, but PAP passpassword and username in clear text.

The username allows a router to verify a username in a profile before the device can to the router. In the following example, username 2503 is allowed to call in to the routit uses the password cisco7:

Host> cd 2503 Host:2305> set ppp authentication PAPHost:2305> set remote access Host:2305> set ppp password Enter new Password: cisco7Re-Type new Password: cisco7Enter User Name: 2503


set ppp address negotiation local

ofile,

rofile

rnal in a

is

set ppp address negotiation localTo force the dynamically negotiated IP address to be assigned to the user-defined pruse the set ppp address negotiation local command.

SEt PPp Address NEgotiation LOcal ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesThe set ppp address negotiation local on command forces the IP address used for PPPInternet Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP) negotiation to be assigned to the Standard por a user-defined profile instead of the Internal profile.

By default, the router first attempts to assign the IPCP negotiated address to the Inteprofile. If the Internal profile already has an IP address, the router places the addressuser-defined profile.

It is recommended that this feature be on when the network access server assigns the IPaddress; specifically, it should be enabled when the LAN profile or the Internal profilealready set up for IP routing.

ON Enable address negotiation.

OFf Disable address negotiation.

PPP Commands 9-3

set ppp address negotiation local

d ISP P ned to

address

ExampleThe following example uses the IP address configured for a user-defined profile namefor PPP negotiation. The router first requests that the IP address configured in the ISprofile be assigned to the router. The address in the access server response is assigthe ISP profile, not the permanent Internal profile.

765> cd ISP 765:ISP> set ppp address negotiation local on

When a call is made and IP address negotiation has occurred, the ISP assigns an IP to the router. To verify the IP address, you can use the show ip config all command.

Related Commandsset dhcp server set ip patset ip routing show ip configshow negotiation


set ppp authentication

st

set ppp authenticationTo set the PPP authentication for incoming and outgoing ISDN calls, use the set ppp authentication command.

SEt PPp AUthentication INcoming | OUtgoing [CHap] [PAp] [NOne]

Syntax Description

Defaultsincoming chap papoutgoing none


INcoming Apply the authentication method to the incoming challenge.

OUtgoing Send a PPP challenge.

CHap Enable Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). You muhave a CHAP host password configured with the set ppp secret command and a user ID configured with the set system name command or the set ppp clientname command at the profile level.

PAp Enable Password Authentication Protocol (PAP). You must have a PAP host password configured with the set ppp password command and a user ID configured with the set system name command in system mode or the set ppp clientname command in profile mode.

NOne No authentication is performed.

PPP Commands 9-5


of the

the n

uests.

sed by

le fined er d, the

64

r is

tion n

nticate

Usage GuidelinesAuthentication depends on the direction of the challenge (as opposed to the direction call). The router attempts to authenticate an incoming challenge when the incoming parameter is set for this command. The router sends a challenge when the outgoing parameter is set for this command.

You can specify one, two, or all of the authentication options. They are negotiated infollowing order: CHAP, PAP, none. If the none keyword is not specified and authenticatiofails, the call is terminated.

This command does not affect how the router responds to remote authentication reqThe router always responds to PAP or CHAP authentication requests.

A client password must be configured with the set ppp password or set ppp secret command to make the authentication response succeed (unless a null password is uthe peer).

The authentication sequence is not required for leased-line connections. To set up aleased-line configuration, authentication should be disabled and a user-defined profinamed leasedline (the name is not case sensitive) must be created or another user-deprofile must be renamed. If the leasedline profile is not present upon call connect, the routrequires authentication to select the correct profile. If the call cannot be authenticatecall is dropped.

Within the leasedline profile, verify that PPP authentication is set to none (the default) by using the show security command. The switch types that support this feature are PERMand PERM128.

The set ppp authentication incoming command works in system mode only. The set ppp authentication outgoing command works in system mode and profile mode. Whateveset in system mode becomes the default setting for each profile. The outgoing authentication method applies to outgoing WAN calls, and provides users with the opof 2-way authentication. In other words, when acting as a remote router dialing into aaccess server, not only is the router authenticated by the access server, it can authethe access server using the set ppp authentication outgoing command.



ExamplesThe following example sets the router to use incoming PAP authentication:

Host> set ppp authentication incoming pap

The following example disables PPP authentication for outgoing calls:

Host:leasedline> set ppp authentication outgoing none

Related Commandset ppp clientnameset ppp secretset systemname

PPP Commands 9-7

set ppp authentication accept

each by

ation ver to n

set ppp authentication acceptTo specify a preferred authentication protocol, use the set ppp authentication accept command.

SEt PPp AUthentication ACcept [CHap | PAp] | [EI ther]

Syntax Description

DefaultAccept either


Usage GuidelinesCisco access servers require a specific authentication protocol to communicate with type of dial-in device. For example, analog modem dial-in devices are authenticated using PAP, and ISDN routers are authenticated by using CHAP.

By default, the Cisco access server proposes PAP in its line-control protocol configurrequest. The Cisco 700 series router rejects PAP and waits for the Cisco access serpropose CHAP. When CHAP is proposed, the router proceeds with the authenticatiophase.

ACcept The Cisco 700 series router is the device being authenticated.

CHap CHAP is the preferred authentication protocol.

PAp PAP is the preferred authentication protocol.

EI ther Either CHAP or PAP can be used for authentication.


set ppp authentication accept

al for

Cisco 700 series router software Release 4.2(2) solves the problem of a PAP proposrejection and includes the flexibility of a fall-back order. You can specify a preferencea particular protocol. However, if the access server requires a protocol other than thepreferred protocol, the router accepts it.

This command cannot be used with the set ppp chaprefuse command because the parameter specifies that CHAP must be refused.

To set a preferred order of authentication for incoming calls, use the set ppp authentication accept command in system mode.

ExamplesThe following example accepts CHAP only:

Host> set ppp authentication accept chap

The following example accepts PAP only:

Host> set ppp authentication accept pap

The following example accepts either protocol, with a preference for CHAP:

Host> set ppp authentication accept chap either

The following example accepts either protocol, with a preference for PAP:

Host> set ppp authentication accept pap either

The following example accepts either protocol, with no preference:

Host> set ppp authentication accept either

Related Commandset ppp authenticationshow security

PPP Commands 9-9

set ppp bacp

ion

e the PPP

e. The ctual

set ppp bacp To enable Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol (BACP), use the set ppp bacp command.

SEt PPp BAcp ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOn

Command ModeSystem or profile model

Usage GuidelinesThe set ppp bacp command defines a set of rules to control dynamic bandwidth allocatgracefully by managing the number of links in a multilink PPP bundle. Bandwidth Allocation Protocol (BAP) defines a set of request and response messages to managlinks. BACP consists of a network control program that negotiates once per multilink bundle.

The router supports dynamic management of both B channels with the demand featurimplementation of BACP and BAP allows the router to coordinate and negotiate the aallocation and deallocation of the second channel.

ON Enable BACP negotiation.

OFf Disable BACP negotiation.


set ppp bacp

p the ter to P

ond ll for

ack

ing

s est

ors .

Add a Link

After BACP has been negotiated, demand traffic triggers a BAP negotiation to bring usecond link of a bundle. Auto mode has to be enabled for the second link for the roustart BAP call or callback request negotiation; otherwise, it can only participate in BAnegotiation initiated by its peer.

The router endorses an incoming BAP call or callback request to add a link if the secB channel is available and the call for the second link is in the same direction as the cathe first link.

When requesting the addition of the second link, the router sends a BAP call or callbrequest to its peer, depending on the direction of the call for the first link.

For a callback request, the router also checks if the set PPP callback reply command is set to on.

Integration with the set auto Command

The set auto command on the second link turns demand dialing on, while the set ppp bacp command identifies if BACP/BAP is negotiated for a multilink PPP bundle.

The following are descriptions of the operation for the four combinations:

• If set ppp bacp on and set 2 auto on commands are entered, the BOD algorithm monitors traffic and sends BAP call/callback request messages to the peer. IncomBAP call/callback request messages from the peer are processed.

• If set ppp bacp on and set 2 auto off commands are entered, the BOD algorithm doenot initiate an addition of the second link, but the incoming BAP call/callback requmessages from the peer are processed.

• If set ppp bacp off and set 2 auto on commands are entered, there is no BACP negotiation when the network control protocol is up. The BOD algorithm only monittraffic and brings up the second link; it does not send a BAP message to the peer

• If set ppp bacp off and set 2 auto off commands are entered, there is no BACP negotiation when the network control protocol is up. The BOD algorithm does notinitiate addition of the second link. The router cannot add a link automatically.

PPP Commands 9-11

set ppp bacp

or . p

freed o tear

efore

can

rom

rop

the

ly.

for

Drop a Link

A link drop is attempted locally when network traffic changes or a resource conflict (fexample, call bumping) arises. This can be achieved with or without BAP negotiationTimeout mode must be enabled for the second link for the router to start BAP link drorequest negotiation.

You might want to release a B channel without excessive delay. The resource has to beto answer an incoming voice call. In this case, no BAP negotiation is done; PPP tries tdown the link immediately.

If negotiation is selected and the peer does not respond to a BAP link-drop request bthe response timer expires, BAP retries according to the PPP negotiations settings.

Integration with the set timeout Command

The set timeout command on the second link determines whether the BOD algorithm tear down the second link based on traffic while the set ppp bacp command determines whether BACP/BAP is negotiated for a multilink PPP bundle.

The following are operation descriptions for the four combinations:

• If set ppp bacp on and set 2 timeout on commands are entered, the BOD algorithmmonitors traffic and sends a BAP link-drop request message to the peer when thecondition of dropping a link is met. The incoming BAP link drop request message fthe peer is acknowledged and the link is always torn down.

• If set ppp bacp on and set 2 timeout off commands are entered, the BOD algorithmdoes not initiate the second link disconnection; however, the incoming BAP link-drequest message from the peer is acknowledged.

• If set ppp bacp off and set 2 timeout on commands are entered, there is no BACP negotiation when the network control protocol is up. The BOD algorithm monitorstraffic and tears down the second link without sending a BAP link-drop request to peer.

• If set ppp bacp off and set 2 timeout off commands are entered, there is no BACP negotiation when the network control protocol is up. The BOD algorithm does notinitiate the second link disconnection. The router cannot drop the link automatical

BACP is only implemented on BRI interfaces. Multilink PPP protocol has to be enabledthe BACP to be functional.


set ppp bacp

Related Commandsdemandset auto set ppp callbackset ppp negotiation countset ppp negotiation retryset ringbackset timeoutshow negotiation

PPP Commands 9-13

set ppp callback

set ppp callbackTo set the callback mode for point-to-point encapsulation, use the set ppp callback command. This command ensures a level of callback security.

SEt PPP CAllback REquest | REply ON | OFf | ALways

Syntax Description



REquest Request a callback when the router places a call.

REply Agree to a callback when requested to do so by a remote router.

ON Enable callback.

OFf Disable callback.

AL ways Force callback at all times.


set ppp callback

il one

alled

y the

r the

The

Usage GuidelinesWhen the calling unit’s request is set to on, the calling unit initiates a callback request. Ifthe callback request is acknowledged by the called unit, the call stays connected untof the following occurs:

• The call is disconnected by the called unit, and another callback is made by the cunit.

• The callback is acknowledged by the called unit, but the callback is not attempted bcalled unit. This could happen if the called unit callback reply is set to off for that profile or the called unit is a product that does not support callback.

• If the calling unit request is set to always, the calling unit disconnects the call afteacknowledgment process. If the called unit reply is set to on or always, the called unit makes a callback to the calling unit.

• If the called unit reply is set to always, the called unit disconnects the original call. called unit attempts a callback.

ExampleThe following example sets the profile to reply always:

Host> set ppp callback reply always

Related Commandsset numberset ppp bacpset ringbackset securityshow security

PPP Commands 9-15

ppp chapallow multihost

router

rom

ppp chapallow multihostTo receive CHAP challenges from hosts with different host names, use the set ppp chapallow multihost command.

SEt PPp CHAPA llow MUl tihost ON | Off

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesThis command should not be set to ON unless the CHAP challenges received by the contain different host names and you do not consider this to be a security risk.

ExampleThe following command sets the router to accept and respond to CHAP challenges fmultiple hosts:

host> set ppp chapallow multihost on

Related Commandsshow securityset ppp chaprefuse

ON Receives CHAP challenges with different host names.

Off Rejects CHAP challenges with different host names.


set ppp chaprefuse

e the

HAP,

nse

eld

ed

set ppp chaprefuseTo set a CHAP filter to authenticate the remote device for CHAP security purposes, usset ppp chaprefuse command.

SEt PPp CHaprefuse AL l | NOne | [IN call] [REsponsefirst] [SAmehost] [DI rectionwrong]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesTo avoid a race condition when using two Cisco 700 series routers to authenticate Cset the responsefirst filter on only one router.

AL l Refuse to authenticate CHAP.

NOne Clear the current filter.

INcall Refuse to authenticate incoming CHAP challenges.

REsponsefirst Ignore the challenge if the remote device has not sent a valid respoto a previous challenge sent by the Cisco 700 series router.

SAmehost Ignore the challenge if the hostname field matches the hostname fiof the Cisco 700 series router.

DI rectionwrong Ignore the challenge if the caller indicates that the call was originatby the Cisco 700 series router.

PPP Commands 9-17

set ppp chaprefuse

ExampleThe following example sets a filter for common security protection:

Host> set ppp chaprefuse responsefirst samehost directionwrong

Related Commandsset passwordset ppp authenticationset ppp authentication acceptshow security


set ppp clientname

e or

et by

blishes ecified

set ppp clientnameTo set different usernames and passwords within the profiles, use the set ppp clientname command.

SEt PPp CL ientname clientname

Syntax Description

DefaultNo PPP client name


Usage GuidelinesRemote users might have multiple service providers. The set ppp clientname command allows profiles to have different usernames. If the client name is not set in profile modsystem mode, a profile uses the system name configured with the set systemname command when dialing out. Each profile can also have its own password or secret susing the set ppp password or the set ppp secret command.

Setting the PPP client name, PAP password, and CHAP secret in system mode estathe default values for the profile mode. These values are used if no other values are spat the profile level.

clientname Identification for the profile.

PPP Commands 9-19

set ppp clientname

Related Commandsset passwordset ppp authenticationset ppp authentication acceptshow securityshow users


set ppp magicnumbercheck

l ith the

hen

set ppp magicnumbercheckTo enable and disable the checking of the magic numbers received in the link controprotocol echo request and echo reply packets against the magic number negotiated wpeer router, use the set ppp magicnumbercheck command.

SEt PPp MA gicnumbercheck ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOn


Usage GuidelinesThe show security command reflects the status of the magic number. For example, wenabled, the show security command displays the following:

scr6> sh secSystem Parameters

SecurityAccess Status ONSystem Password NONERemote Configuration PROTECTEDLocal Configuration ONLogout Timeout 5Caller ID Security OFF

ON Checks the magic numbers.

OFf Does not check the magic numbers.

PPP Commands 9-21

set ppp magicnumbercheck

Caller Id Numbers

PPP SecurityPPP Authentication IN CHAP PAPCHAP REFUSE NONECHAP ALLOW MULTIHOST OFFMAGIC NUMBER CHECK ON

Profile ParametersPPP Security

PPP Authentication OUT NONEPPP Authentication ACCEPT EITHERToken Authentication Support

TAS Client 0.0.0.0Use Local CHAP Secret ON

ClientUser Name loc1PAP Password NONECHAP Secret NONE

HostPAP Password NONECHAP Secret NONE

CallbackRequest OFFReply OFF

Related Commandshow security


set ppp multilink

2(3.5). , all

can

e

set ppp multilinkTo configure the way that PPP links are aggregated, use the set ppp multilink command.

SEt PPP MUltilink ON | OFf [PPPHeader ON | OFf]

Syntax Description

DefaultMultilink On (enabled)Multilink Header Off (disabled)


Usage GuidelinesA PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) header option has been added to software Release 4.In previous software versions, when multilink is enabled and only one link is availabledata packets are sent with multilink headers. This unnecessarily increases network overhead when a PPP header would be acceptable. The PPPHeader option of the set ppp multilink command specifies that when only one link is up, the data packets be sent with a PPP header.

ON Enable the router to negotiate the multilink PPP protocol. (This protocol allows data to be sent over multiple channels.)

OFf Disable the router from requesting multilink PPP negotiation. If the remotrouter requests multilink PPP, the router accepts it, regardless of this setting.

PPPHeader Uses the PPP header when only one link is up when set to on. Always uses the multilink header when set to off (default).

PPP Commands 9-23

set ppp multilink

ExampleThe following example configures the router so it does not initiate negotiation of multilink PPP:

Host> set ppp multilink off


set ppp negotiation count

se the

e a

set ppp negotiation countTo configure the number of times the router attempts to get a successful negotiation, uset ppp negotiation count command.

SEt PPp NEgotiation COunt attempts

Syntax Description

Default10 attempts for PPP


ExampleThe following example configures the router to attempt negotiation 20 times:

Host> set ppp negotiation count 20

Related Commandsdemandset auto set ppp bacpset ppp callbackset ppp negotiation retryset ringbackset timeoutshow negotiation

attempts Number of times the router attempts to get a successful negotiation. Must bnumber between 1 and 100.

PPP Commands 9-25

set ppp negotiation integrity

SDN

1

set ppp negotiation integrityTo configure time in seconds between line-integrity packets, use the set ppp negotiation integrity command.

SEt PPP NEgotiation IN tegrity seconds | OFf

Syntax Description

Default10 seconds


Usage GuidelinesIf the router does not receive a line-integrity packet for three consecutive periods, the Iline disconnects.

ExampleThe following example sets the interval between line-integrity packets to 5 seconds.

Host> set ppp negotiation integrity 5

seconds Time in seconds between line-integrity packets. Must be a number betweenand 60.

OFf Disable line-integrity packets.


set ppp negotiation integrity

Related Commandsdemandset auto set ppp bacpset ppp callbackset ppp negotiation countset ppp negotiation retryset ringbackset timeoutshow negotiation

PPP Commands 9-27

set ppp negotiation retry

e

set ppp negotiation retryTo configure the amount of time (retry interval) between negotiation attempts, use th set ppp negotiation retry command.

SEt PPp NEgotiation REtry milliseconds

Syntax Description

Default3000 milliseconds for PPP


ExampleThe following example configures the router to attempt negotiation every 5 seconds:

Host> set ppp negotiation retry 5000

Related Commandsdemandset auto set ppp bacpset ppp callbackset ppp negotiation countset ppp negotiation integrityset ringbackset timeoutshow negotiation

milliseconds Amount of time (in milliseconds) between negotiation attempts. Must bea number between 200 and 6000.


set ppp ip netmask local

e

the d the 4.2(2) d of

g

set ppp ip netmask localTo configure the netmask in a profile as the netmask for the WAN connection, use thset ppp ip netmask local command.

SEt PPP IP NEtmask LOcal ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesBefore software Release 4.2(2), the router used the default netmask associated withnegotiated IP address. Although you could specify a netmask, it would be ignored, andefault netmask for the negotiated IP address would be used. With software Releaseyou can specify that the netmask configured in the user profile should be used insteathe default netmask for the negotiated IP address.

ExampleThe following example sets the netmask to the negotiated value:

Host> set ppp ip netmask local off

ON Uses the netmask configured in profile mode for the WAN connection usinthat profile.

OFf Uses the default netmask.

PPP Commands 9-29

set ppp ip netmask local

Related Commandset ip addressset ip netmask


set ppp password

he

L

the

set ppp passwordTo configure the passwords used during PAP and CHAP PPP authentication, use the set ppp password command.

SEt PPP PAssword | SEcret HOst | CL ient [ENcrypted] [<password>]

Syntax Description

DefaultNo passwords


PAssword Use the password for PAP authentication.

SEcret Use the password for CHAP authentication.

HOst Use profile configurations to authenticate a remote router. The remotedevice client password must match the Cisco 700 series router host password.

CL ient Use local configurations to authenticate the Cisco 700 series router. Trouter client password must match the remote device host password.

ENcrypted Used by the computer when loading a saved configuration text file (UPoutput) into the router.

password The password used for authentication. If the password is absent from command statement, you are prompted for the entry.

PPP Commands 9-31

set ppp password

d in

into

uter

you

eld

Usage GuidelinesProfiles that do not have passwords configured explicitly use the password configuresystem mode.

The encrypted parameter is used by the computer when loading a saved configurationthe router.

When this command is loaded back into the original router (or another router), the roknows the password is already encrypted by examining the encrypted parameter.

Warning Do not use the encrypted parameter when typing in the system password manually. If you do, the router will try to decrypt it, and you will not be able to log in to the router.

ExamplesThe following example configures the router with a PAP client password by promptingfor the password and verification of the password:

Host> set ppp password clientEnter new Password: <new password >Re-Type new Password: <new password >

The following example deletes the CHAP client password by leaving the password fiand verification field blank:

Host> set ppp secret clientEnter new Password: Re-Type new Password:

Related Commandsset passwordset ppp authenticationset ppp authentication acceptshow security


set ppp tas

and that a vice r

t.

set ppp tasTo change the user mode, use the set ppp tas command. (TAS is the acronym for Token Authentication Support.)

SEt PPP TAS CEntral | DIstributed | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesWhen the router sends a request to an Authentication Authority Account (AAA) client receives a reply, it tries to make an ISDN connection. However, there is no guaranteeB channel will be available for this connection. Other profiles or plain old telephone ser(POTS) ports might occupy both B channels. If a B channel is not available, the routesends a failure message back to the AAA client.

CEntral Turn on single-user mode and send a user-information request to the designated Token Authentication Client.

DIstributed Turn on single-user mode, but send a user-information request to the source of the interesting packet if the interesting packet is an IP packe

OFf Turn off single-user mode.

PPP Commands 9-33

set ppp tas

t to

ExampleThe following example turns on single-user mode and sends a user-information requesthe designated Token Authentication Client:

Host> set ppp tas central

Related Commandsset ppp tas show security


set ppp tas chapsecret local

tion

t

set ppp tas chapsecret localTo set the Token Authentication Client to use CHAP from the Cisco Secure AuthenticaAgent for CHAP to be configured locally, use the set ppp tas chapsecret local command.

SEt PPP TAS CHapsecret LOcal ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesWhen the router is authenticated with CHAP, this setting determines if Token Authentication Client can overwrite the chapsecret parameter by providing a CHAP secrein its reply to the router.

ExampleThe following example turns local Token Authentication Client CHAP secret on:

Host> set ppp tas chapsecret local on

Related Commandsset ppp tas show security

ON Turn on the local configuration.

OFf Turn off the local configuration.

PPP Commands 9-35

set ppp tas client

n

very

set ppp tas clientTo identify the Token Authorization Client (also known as Cisco Secure AuthenticatioAgent client) to which the router sends the user information request, use the set ppp tas client command.

SEt PPP TAS CLient ipaddress

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesIn system mode, this command configures the default Token Authorization Client for eprofile. In profile mode, it overwrites the system-level setting. Unless TAS is set to off, a profile is required to set the Token Authorization Client.

ExampleThe following example sets the TAS client to 10.10.10.3:

Host> set ppp tas client 10.10.10.3

ipaddress TAS client IP address.


set ppp tas client

Related Commandsset ppp tas set ppp tas chapsecretshow security

PPP Commands 9-37

set ppp termreq count

t

g the

ing

set ppp termreq countTo configure the number of times the router sends a terminate request packet withoureceiving an answer or disconnecting the ISDN line, use the set ppp termreq count command.

SEt PPP TErmreq COunt attempt

Syntax Description

DefaultTwo tries


ExampleThe following example sends terminate request packets five times before disconnectinISDN line:

Host> set ppp termreq count 5

attempt Number of times the router sends a terminate request packet without receivan answer or disconnecting the ISDN line. Must be between 1 and 100.


show negotiation

e

lays

show negotiationTo display all negotiation parameters, use the show negotiation command.

SHow NEgotiation [AL l]

Syntax Description


Usage GuidelinesIn profile mode, this command displays only parameters that can be configured by thprofile. Values redefined from the template value are indicated with an asterisk.

In system mode, this command displays all system parameters. This command dispboth system and profile parameters when the all parameter is included in the statement.

ExampleThe following example shows output from the show negotiation command:

Host> show negotiationSystem Parameters

CPP Negotiation ParametersIntegrity Interval 10Negotiation Abort DISCONNECTRetry Count 6Retry Interval 1000Terminate Count 2Multilink ON

AL l Display system and profile negotiation parameters.

PPP Commands 9-39

show negotiation

Profile Parameters

Compression STACBACP ONAddress Negotiation Local OFF

Negotiated ParametersConnection 1 VirtualConnection 2 VirtualConnection 3 VirtualConnection 4 Virtual

Related Commandsdemandset auto set ppp bacpset ppp callbackset ppp negotiation countset ppp negotiation retryset ringbackset timeout


C H A P T E R

SNMP Commands

1 0

SNMP Commands
ent This chapter describes the commands used to configure System Network Managem
Protocol (SNMP) parameters, such as management station and traps.

10-1

reset snmp traphost

.

reset snmp traphostTo delete one or all of the configured trap hosts, use the reset snmp traphost command.

REset SNmp TRaphost [ipaddress | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example deletes one traphost:

Host> reset snmp traphost 150.150.50.25

Related Commandset snmp traphost

ipaddress IP address of the configured trap host in four-part dotted decimal notation

AL l Deletes all configured trap hosts.


set snmp contact

f this

on.

set snmp contactTo enter the username of the contact person who has the management information onode, use the set snmp contact command.

SEt SNmp COntact contactname

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesTo delete the contact name, enter the command without the contact name.

ExamplesThe following example configures a contact name to be associated with SNMP information:

Host> set snmp contact “Thomas Doe”

The following example deletes the contact name:

Host> set snmp contact

contactname User name of a contact person who has all the management informatiMust be between 1 and 64 characters. If it includes spaces, the entirestring of characters must be enclosed in quotation marks.

SNMP Commands 10-3

set snmp contact

Related Commandsset snmp locationset snmp trapset snmp trap hostshow snmp


set snmp location

t.

the

s s.

set snmp locationTo enter the physical location of the router, use the set snmp location command.

SEt SNmp LOcation location

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesTo delete the location name, enter the command without the location-name argumen

ExamplesThe following example configures the location name San Jose to be associated withrouter:

Host> set snmp location “ San Jose ”

The following example deletes the location name:

Host> set snmp location

location Location name, must be between 1 and 64 characters. If the name includespaces, the entire string of characters must be enclosed in quotation mark

SNMP Commands 10-5

set snmp location

Related Commandsset snmp contactset snmp trapset snmp trap hostshow snmp


set snmp trap

rt,

set snmp trapTo specify when traps are sent to the network management station, use the set snmp trap command.

SEt SNmp TRap [COldstart = ON | OFf] [LI nkup = ON | OFf] [LI nkdown ON | OFf] [AUthenticationfail ON | OFf]

Syntax Description

DefaultTraps are never sent (all off).


ON Traps are sent when any of the listed conditions occur: coldstart, linkup, linkdown, or authentication failure.

OFf Traps are not sent when any of the listed conditions occur: coldstalinkup, linkdown, or authentication failure.

COldstart Coldstart trap is sent when the router is powered on.

LI nkup A new connection is established. Does not apply to individual B channel establishment.

LI nkdown A connection is closed. Does not apply to individual B channels closing.

AUthenticationfail Authentication fails.

SNMP Commands 10-7

set snmp trap

ent

is , and

tion rn

e or e LAN

e

p host e, it

p, the kup

s all ofile, the

ake nt

. This ate a

Usage GuidelinesThe set snmp trap command configures when traps are sent to the network managemsystem.

The set active command causes the linkup trap to be sent, indicating an active profile available. If there is traffic for this profile, a call is made, the connection is establishedthe traffic is sent.

A linkdown trap is sent when a WAN profile is set to inactive. Setting a WAN profile inactive makes it unavailable when there is traffic to be sent to this profile. If a connecis established for this profile, setting it to inactive also causes the connection to be todown.

Bringing the channels up and down will not trigger the traps. Setting a profile to activinactive causes the traps to be sent. You can set up your PC as a trap host, set up thIP address to be in the same subnet as the PC, and turn IP routing on. If you enter the set active command for any WAN profile, you will see a link up trap sent to your PC on thLAN connection. If you enter the set inactive command for the WAN profile, you will see a link-down trap sent to your PC.

Where the trap is sent depends on where the trap host you specify resides. If the traresides on the LAN side, it is sent to the LAN. If the trap host resides on the WAN sidis sent to the WAN profile through which the trap host can be reached.

For coldstart, the trap is generated when the router is powered up. During the power urouter sets up the LAN profile. If the linkup trap is enabled and a trap host exists, a lintrap for the LAN profile is sent to this trap host. During power up, the router also readuser (WAN) profiles that existed before it was powered down. As it reads the user prit creates the corresponding user profile, and if the profile has attribute of "power upactive," the router sets the profile to active, and the linkup trap for this profile is sent totrap host. During the power up, link up traps are then sent to the trap host.

The set active command sets up the user profile so that it is available for the router to mthe call and establish connection if the traffic demands it. The coldstart trap will be seonly when a profile is issued a set active command, be it by the router or by the usertrap has nothing to do with the B channel being activated or a call being made to initiconnection.


set snmp trap

mber

u

ive, it N

et able

an er

d and

If demand is on (auto on), the packet can trigger a call to be made based on the call nuin this profile, and when a connection is established, the queued trap packet will be forwarded.

If you turn on log connection, where the connection is that of the WAN user profile, yoshould see an SNMP linkup trap packet received when you enter the set active command for this profile.

If the trap host resides on the same connection as the profile that has been set inactwill not see this trap. If the trap host resides on the LAN connection or in another WAprofile, the linkdown trap will be sent to these profiles, and the trap host will see it.

The LAN profile, because it is permanently active, does not accept the set active or sinactive command. So you do not see the linkdown trap at all. Unplugging the LAN cdoes not cause any linkdown trap to be sent.

If you have the Novell LAN Analyzer software or connect a sniffer to the router, you ccapture all packets from the router, and it will tell you if SNMP linkup/linkdown or othtraps have been sent by the router.

ExampleThe following example configures the router to send traps when the router is rebootewhen authentication fails:

Host> set snmp trap coldstart on authenticationfail on

Related Commandsset snmp contactset snmp trap hostshow snmp

SNMP Commands 10-9

set snmp traphost

eives

ment

s in be

set snmp traphostTo configure the router with the IP address of a network management station that recSNMP traps, use the set snmp traphost command.

SEt SNmp TRAPHOst ipaddress

Syntax Description

DefaultThe default IP address is 0.0.0.0.


ExampleThe following example configures the router with the IP address of a network managestation that will receive traps from the router:

Host> set snmp traphost 150.150.50.25

Related Commandsreset snmp traphostset snmp contactset snmp trapshow snmp

ipaddress IP address of a network management station that receives the SNMP trapfour-part dotted decimal notation. A maximum of eight IP addresses can entered with this command.


show snmp

ff.

ff.

ff.

show snmpTo display SNMP configuration for the router, use the show snmp command.

SHow SNmp


ExampleThe following example shows output from the show snmp command:

Host> show snmp

SNMPContact “Thomas Doe”Location “Aptos”Trap COLDSTART OFFTrap LINKDOWN OFFTrap LINKUP OFFTrap AUTHENTICATIONFAIL ONTrap Host 150.150.50.25Trap Host 150.150.30.35


Table 10-1 Show SNMP Field Descriptions

Field Description

Contact Router contact name.

Location Router location.

Coldstart Indicates whether a trap is sent when the unit is rebooted. Can be On or O

Linkdown Indicates whether a trap is sent when a connection closes. Can be On or O

Linkup Indicates whether a trap is sent when a connection opens. Can be On or O

SNMP Commands 10-11

show snmp

ff.
Authentication fail Indicates whether a trap is sent when authentication fails. Can be On or O
Trap Host IP address(es) of management stations to which traps are sent.

Table 10-1 Show SNMP Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Description


C H A P T E R

DTMF Commands

1 1

DTMF Commands
the
imited wed ey to

D on s

This chapter describes the dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) commands that apply tobasic telephone service interface (PHONE1 and PHONE2) on the router.

Caution Do not perform these commands on a terminal connected to the router. You must perform these commands on the telephone keypad of the device that is connected to the router through the basic telephone service ports (also known as plain old telephone service or POTS ports).

These configuration commands are entered from the telephone keypad to enable a lset of parameters. To enter DTMF commands, you must first press the * key twice folloby the 2-digit designator for the command. After entering the command, press the # kexecute the command. The following is an example of a DTMF command:

**sw#

If the command has been entered properly and is being processed, the telephone LEthe router blinks rapidly. If the command is entered in error, the telephone LED blinkslowly over an extended period of time.

Note These commands apply only to routers with analog telephone support. These commands should be executed before connecting the router to the ISDN line.

* Represents the * key on the telephone keypad.

# Represents the # key on the telephone keypad.

11-1

set dtmf call transfer

the :

ted.

set dtmf call transferTo transfer a call to another caller during an active call, use the set dtmf call transfer command.

**95#

DefaultNone

Command ModeTelephone keypad

ExampleTo transfer an active call, enter the following command (current call is put on hold):

**95#

After hearing a dial tone, dial the number to which the call will be transferred. While telephone is ringing or after the call is connected, enter the following command again

**95#

The call is now transferred, and the caller who initiated the call transfer is disconnec

Note Some switch types allow only incoming calls to be transferred.


set dtmf call conference

t on

nter

when

set dtmf call conferenceTo add an additional caller to an active call, use the set dtmf call conference command.

**97#

DefaultNone


ExampleTo add conferencing to an active call, enter the following command (current call is puhold):

**97#

After hearing a dial tone, dial the number of the third party. After the call is connected, ethe following command again:

**97#

All three callers are now connected.

Note When using a 5ESS line, disconnected messages appear on the user interfacecall conference is activated. These are expected and should be ignored.

DTMF Commands 11-3

set dtmf cancel call waiting

tered

set dtmf cancel call waitingTo disable the call-waiting feature for the duration of a specific call, use the set dtmf cancel call waiting command.

**99#

DefaultNone. Call-waiting is active if the feature has been subscribed on the line.


Usage GuidelinesThis command is used to turn off call-waiting during a call. The command must be enbefore a telephone number is dialed. When the call is completed, call waiting is automatically reactivated.

ExampleEnter the following command on the telephone keypad to cancel call waiting:

**99#

Related Commandset callwaiting


set dtmf directory number

ers,

old

set dtmf directory numberTo configure the plain old telephone service (POTS) port with the ISDN directory numbuse the set dtmf directory number command.

**03 1 | 2 [number * [subaddress]]#

Syntax Description



Usage GuidelinesThis parameter must be configured to make analog-to-analog calls through the plaintelephone service (POTS) port. This should be configured before the ISDN line is connected.

1 | 2 ISDN link to which the directory number applies. Can be 1 or 2. Depending on your ISDN service provider, your line might be assigned one or two service profile identification (SPID) numbers.

number The directory number assigned by the telephone company. Can consist of 1 to 20 digits.

subaddress Subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line. Can consist of 1 to 10 digits.

DTMF Commands 11-5

set dtmf directory number

for

ExamplesEnter the following commands on the telephone keypad to set the directory numbersboth channel 1 and channel 2:

**03 1 5551234#**03 2 5551235#

Related Commandset directorynumber


set dtmf disable dial terminator

is

set dtmf disable dial terminatorTo disable # as the indicator of the end of a dialing string for a particular call, use theset dtmf disable dial terminator command.

**98 #

Note This command is applicable only in Japan.

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe command must be entered before a telephone number is dialed. When the call completed, the # is automatically enabled to indicate the end of dialing.

DTMF Commands 11-7

set dtmf gateway

Enter

le

set dtmf gatewayTo configure the Internal profile default gateway from the plain old telephone service(POTS) port, use the set dtmf gateway command.

**06octet1*octet2*octet3*octet4#

Syntax Description

Default0.0.0.0


Usage GuidelinesThis parameter must be configured from the plain old telephone service (POTS) port. this command on the telephone keypad before the ISDN line is connected.

ExampleEnter the following command on the telephone keypad to configure the internal profidefault gateway:

**06150*150*10*10#

Related Commandset gateway

octet1...4 One octet of an IP address. Together, the four octets should make up the internal profile gateway address.


set dtmf ip address

S)

e IP

set dtmf ip addressTo configure the Internal profile IP address from the plain old telephone service (POTport, use the set dtmf ip address command.


Syntax Description

Default0.0.0.0


Usage GuidelinesThis parameter must be configured from the POTS port. Enter this command on the telephone keypad before the ISDN line is connected.

ExampleEnter the following command on the telephone keypad to configure the internal profiladdress 150.150.10.17:

**05150*150*10*17#

Related Commandset ip address

octet1...4 One octet of an IP address. Together, the four octets make up the internal profile IP address.

DTMF Commands 11-9

set dtmf ip netmask

TS)

le

set dtmf ip netmaskTo configure the Internal profile subnet mask from the plain old telephone service (POport, use the set dtmf ip netmask command.


Syntax Description

Default0.0.0.0


Usage GuidelinesThis parameter must be configured from the POTS port. Enter this command on the telephone keypad before the ISDN line is connected.

ExampleEnter the following command on the telephone keypad to configure the internal profisubnet mask:

**07

Related Commandsset ip netmaskset subnet

octet1...4 One octet of an IP address. Together, the four octets make up the internal profile’s IP address.


set dtmf number

n old

set dtmf numberTo configure the specific telephone number(s) that each link will call, use the set dtmf number command.

**04 1 | 2 [number * [subaddress]]#

Syntax Description



Usage GuidelinesThis parameter must be configured to make data calls automatically through the plaitelephone service (POTS) ports. This should be configured before the ISDN line is connected. set dtmf number puts a number in the Standard profile.


1 | 2 ISDN link to which the directory number applies. Can be 1 or 2. Depending on your ISDN service provider, your line might be assigned one or two service profile identification (SPID) numbers.

number The telephone number assigned by the telephone company. Can consist of 1 to 32 digits.

subaddress Subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line. Can consist of 1 to 10 digits.

DTMF Commands 11-11

set dtmf spid

e

port.

port

es

ber

set dtmf spidTo configure the plain old telephone service (POTS) port with the ISDN SPID, use thset dtmf spid command.

**02 1 | 2 [spid]#

Syntax Description

DefaultNo SPIDs are configured.


Usage GuidelinesThis parameter must be configured to make analog-to-analog calls through the POTSThis should be configured before the ISDN line is connected.

ExamplesEnter the following on the telephone keypad to configure the basic telephone servicewith the SPIDs for both B channels:

**02 01408555123401#**02 02408555123402#

1 | 2 ISDN link to which the SPID applies. If no channel is specified, the SPID applito both channels.

spid Number identifying the service to which you have subscribed. This value is assigned by the ISDN service provider and is usually a ten-digit telephone numwith some extra digits. Can consist of 1 to 20 digits.


set dtmf spid

Related Commandset spid id

DTMF Commands 11-13

set dtmf switch (North American Models Only)

line

:

set dtmf switch (North American Models Only)To configure the plain old telephone service (POTS) port with the central office ISDNswitch type, use the set dtmf switch command.

** switch#

Syntax Description

DefaultNo switch configured


Usage GuidelinesThis command is for U. S. models only. This parameter must be configured to make analog-to-analog calls over the POTS port and should be configured before the ISDNis connected.

switch The switch type used by your ISDN line. Must be represented by 10, 11, or 12

• 10—Lucent 5ESS

• 11—Northern Telecom DMS 100

• 12—NI1



ith

ExampleEnter the following command on the telephone keypad to configure the POTS port wISDN switch type 5ESS:

**10#

Related Commandset switch

DTMF Commands 11-15

C H A P T E R

Remote CAPI Commands

1 2

Remote CAPI Commands
ing for
g es llows ne or

tocols ction te,

),

25

This chapter describes the commands needed for configuration tasks such as enablRemote CAPI (RCAPI), configuring the TCP port on which the RCAPI server listens client requests, and configuring the Cisco 700 series router to distinguish between incoming RCAPI calls and incoming calls of other types.

The Common Application Programing Interface (CAPI) is an application programmininterface standard used to access ISDN equipment connected to Basic Rate Interfac(BRIs) and Primary Rate Interfaces (PRIs). It provides a standardized interface that aapplication programs to use ISDN drivers and controllers. One application can use omore controllers. Several applications can share one or more controllers.

CAPI provides a selection mechanism that supports applications that use different proat different protocol levels and standardized network access by performing an abstrafrom different protocol variables. All connection-related data, such as connection stadisplay messages, and so on, is available to the applications at any time.

The framing protocols supported by CAPI include High-Level Data Link Control (HDLCHDLC inverted, bit transparent (speech), and V.110 synchronous/asynchronous.

CAPI integrates the following data link and network layer protocols:

• Link Access Procedure on the D channel (LAPD) in accordance with Q.921 for X.D-channel implementation.

• Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

• ISO 8208 (X.25 DTE-DTE).

• X.25 DCE, T.90NL, and T.30 (fax group 3).

12-1

CAPI Features

rom

CP CP)

CAPI FeaturesCAPI has the following features:

• Basic call features, such as call set up and clear-down.

• Multiple B channels for data and voice connections.

• Several logical data link connections within a physical connection.

• Ability to select different services and protocols during connection setup and on answering incoming calls.

• Transparent interface for protocols above Layer 3.

• One or more BRIs as well as PRI on one or more ISDN adapters.

• Multiple applications.

• Operating systems-independent messages.

• Operating system-dependent exchange mechanism for optimum operating systemintegration.

• Asynchronous event-driven mechanism, resulting in high throughput.

• Well-defined mechanism for manufacturer-specific extensions.

• Multiple supplementary services.

CAPI and RVS-COMThe Cisco 700 series router supports the ISDN Device Control Protocol (ISDN-DCP) fRVS-COM. ISDN-DCP allows a workstation on the LAN or router to use legacy dial computer telephony integration (CTI) applications. These applications include fax transmitting and receiving and placing and receiving phone calls.

Using ISDN-DCP, the router acts as a DCP server. By default, the router listens for Dmessages on TCP port number 2578 (the Internet-assigned number for RVS-COM Don its LAN port.


Supported B Channel Protocols

ort of nding the

, the t. The

ent o the

When the router receives a DCP message from a DCP client (connected to the LAN pthe router), the router processes the message and acts on it. The actions include seconfirmations to the DCP clients and sending ISDN packets through the BRI port of router.

When the router receives packets on its BRI port destined for one of the DCP clientsrouter formats the packet as a DCP message and sends it to the corresponding clienrouter supports all the DCP messages specified in the ISDN-DCP specification.

Supported B Channel ProtocolsThe Cisco 700 series router provides two 64-kbps B channels to CAPI clients. Each B channel can be configured separately to work in either HDLC mode or bit transparmode. For CAPI support, the higher layer protocols (B2 through B7) are transparent tapplications using these B channels.

The ISDN Core Engine of RVS-COM supports the following B channel protocols:

• CAPI layer B1

— 64 kbps with HDLC framing

— 64-kbps bit-transparent operation with byte framing from the network

— T.30 modem for fax group 3

— Modem with full negotiation

• CAPI layer B2

— X.75 SLP (ISO 7776) with V.42bis compression option (negotiated)

— V.120 with V.42bis compression option (negotiated)

— Transparent

— T.30 modem for fax group 3


• CAPI layer B3

— Transparent

— T.90NL with compatibility to T.70NL according to T.90 Appendix II

Remote CAPI Commands 12-3

CAPI and RVS-COM

it/s

and

t use sfer, u lay

router r; the

— ISO 8208 (X.25 DTE-DTE) modulo 8 and windows size 2, no multiple logical connections

— T.30 for fax group 3


• T.30 for fax group 3 (SFF file format [default], sending and receiving up to 14400 bwith ECM option, modulations V.17, V.21, V.27ter, V.29)

• Analog modem (sending and receiving up to 14400 bit/s with V.42 error correctionV.42bis compression option, modulations V.21, V.22, V.22bis, V.23, V.32, V.32bis)

Supported D-Channel Protocols• CAPI support is available only for the ISDN switch type Net3.

Supported Applications ISDN-DCP supports CAPI and non-CAPI applications. Applications are supported thaone or two B channels for data transfer, different HDLC-based protocols, Euro File tranor fax G4; also supported are applications that send bit-transparent data, such as A/Maudio, fax G3, analog modem, or analog telephones.

Remote CAPI Router CommandsThe commands described in this chapter have been added to the user interface of theto support CAPI. Note that CAPI runs on a remote network device other than the routeCisco 700 series router enables remote CAPI applications.


diag rcapi

t

een

diag rcapiTo display diagnostic information about the Device Control Protocol (DCP) and abouDCP-to-host communication, use the diag rcapi command.

DIag RCapi ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesThe diag rcapi command displays all of the DCP messages that are transmitted betwthe Cisco 700 series router and the DCP client, as shown in this example:

DCP: fmt1 : fmt2 : Message

If displayed, fmt1 indicates the session identifier and fmt2 indicates the controller or connection identifier.

ON Turn on the diagnostic display.

OFf Turn off the diagnostic display.


diag rcapi

ExampleThe following example shows output from the diag rcapi on command:

Host:2503> diag rcapi onDCP:Received DCP_CAPABILITIES_REQDCP: DCPVersion = 256DCP: MaxSessionCount = 100DCP: ManufactureId = 268435457DCP: DeviceId = 1DCP: DeviceVersion = 256DCP:Sending DCP_CAPABILITIES_CONFDCP:Received DCPSC_START_REQDCP: SessionMode = 0DCP: SessionTimeout = 5DCP: SessionIndex = 6DCP:New Session Accepted with ID: 16777224DCP:16777224:Sending DCPSC_START_CONFDCP:16777224:interval = 250000DCP:16777224:33554433:Received DCPCC_LISTEN_REQDCP:Sending DCPCC_LISTEN_CONFDCP:16777224:ListenMode = OFFDCP:16777224:Received DCPCC_CALL_REQDCP:16777224:DeviceModeDCP: Framing HDLCDCP: CalledPartyNumber 4805010DCP:16777224:ConnectionId allocated is 50332929DCP:16777224:50332929:Sending DCPCC_CALL_CONF

Related Commandsset rcapiset rcapi numberset rcapi server port


reset rcapi number

reset rcapi numberTo reset the RCAPI directory number, use the reset rcapi number command.

REset RCapi NUmber number.subaddress | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesIf you reset all of the directory numbers, the RCAPI number is automatically reset.

ExampleThe following example clears all previously set RCAPI directory numbers:

Host> reset rcapi all

Related Commandset rcapi number

number Clears a specific directory number assigned to RCAPI calls.

subaddress Clears a specific subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line.

AL l Clears all RCAPI numbers.


set rcapi

set rcapiTo enable or disable RCAPI , use the set rcapi command.

SEt RCapi ON | OFf

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesThe router must be rebooted in order for this command to take effect.

ExampleThe following example enables RCAPI:

Host> set rcapi on

Related Commandsset directorynumberset rcapi numberset rcapi server port

ON Enables RCAPI.

OFf Disables RCPI.


set rcapi number

een nd

to any

set rcapi number To reserve a directory number for use by RCAPI, use the set rcapi number command.

SEt RCapi NUmber number.subaddress

Syntax Description

Default No directory number is configured.


Usage GuidelinesThe set rcapi number command enables the Cisco 700 series router to distinguish betwincoming RCAPI calls and incoming calls of other types (for example, POTS, PPP, aX.25) by reserving some directory numbers exclusively for incoming RCAPI calls.

The RCAPI number must already be set as a directory number, and you cannot set it other interface type (such as POTS, or DOV). You can set a maximum of six RCAPI directory numbers.

number The directory number assigned to RCAPI calls. Can have 2 to20 digits.

subaddress Subaddress of a device on a multipoint ISDN line. Can have 1to 10 digits.


set rcapi number

ExampleThe following example sets the RCAPI number to 5553000.5553100:

Host> set rcapi number 5553000.5553100

Related Commandsreset rcapi numberset rcapi


set rcapi server port

e the

set rcapi server portTo set the TCP port number on which the RCAPI server listens for client requests, usset rcapi server port command.

SEt RCapi SErver POrt number

Syntax Description

DefaultThe default port number is 2578.


Usage GuidelinesYou must reboot the router for this command to take effect.

ExampleThe following example configures the TCP port number to 2550:

Host> set rcapi server port 2550

Related Commandset rcapi

number The TCP port number on which the RCAPI server listens for client requests.


show rcapi status

show rcapi statusTo display the RCAPI configuration, use the show rcapi status command.

SHow RCapi Status


ExampleThe following example shows the output of the show rcapi status command:

Host> show rcapi status Rcapi Server ONRcapi Server Port 2578Rcapi Number(s) 5310

CLIENT SESSION-ID LISTEN CONNECTION-ID TYPE CALL-STATUS------------------------------------------------------------------------192.168.100.3 16777218 ON192.168.100.5 16777227 OFF 50333953 HDLC CONNECTED192.168.100.6 16777228 OFF 50334209 BIT-TRANSPARENT CONNECTED

Related Commandsset rcapiset rcapi numberset rcapi server port


C H A P T E R

X.25 Commands

1 3

X.25 Commands
hannel .25 p with
B2) video.

d the rk. hed

The

y, and

on is call

This chapter describes the commands needed to configure X.25 over the B (bearer) cand the D (demand) channel. The commands described in this chapter require the XCisco 700 series router software image. The image is posted on CCO; it does not shithe router.

Basic Rate Interface (BRI) is an ISDN interface consisting of two B channels (B1 andand one D channel. The B channels are commonly used to transfer data, voice, and The D channel is commonly used to carry signal and call setup information.

Virtual CircuitsX.25 virtual circuits define an end-to-end, logical connection between two network endpoints. Each circuit uses a logical channel number (LCN) between the endpoint annetwork. Therefore, a single circuit requires two LCNs, one at each end of the netwoVirtual circuits are available in two forms, permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and switcvirtual circuits (SVCs).

PVCs are always present when the network and the link to the network are present. advantages of permanent circuits are as follows:

• Security (no one can place calls to or from a PVC).

• No call management procedures are required from the end device.

Deployment of PVC-based circuits tends to be less common due to the cost and delaPVCs are not supported on Cisco 700 series routers.

SVCs are established at the start of a session and maintained until the communicaticomplete. Billing for SVCs is often based on hold time (the duration the circuit is up), establishment events, and data volume.

13-1

Virtual Circuits

xcess ace

t data d. To re

n the

into tions

D-Channel Packet ServiceD-channel packet-based service allows ISDN subscribers to take advantage of the ebandwidth on the signaling (D) channel. Normally, the D-channel transports commonchannel signaling information related to the B channel data signal. A basic rate interf(BRI) allocates 16 kbps to the D-channel, far more than what is required for signalingalone.

The D-channel packet service pipes the D-channel packet data to the carrier’s packenetwork. As a result, the carrier can control which D-channel packet service is allowelimit the erosion of existing packet data network business, policy-based restrictions ausually placed on packet-based services.

Some ISDN service providers allow subscribers to use some or all of the D-channel bandwidth to transport X.25 packets over the link. The bandwidth available depends ovolume of signaling traffic, and in some cases, it is limited to 9600 bps.

Functional DescriptionThe Transaction Processing/D-channel Processing (TP/DCP ) service can be dividedthe following subsections, as shown in Figure 13-1. (See the section “TP CommunicaProcessing” for more information.)

• Local communications

• TP communications processing

• WAN communications

Cisco 700 Series Router Command Reference13-2

Local Communications

of the y el.

meters

ic

as r the

an l at the he nd sent

er the is no

Figure 13-1 TP/DCP Processing

Packet services on the D channel are considered a special routing function because restrictions. A transaction processing communication function called D-channel PolicRouting (DCPR) qualifies IP frames from the LAN for transmission over the D channDCPR defines and implements policies that control D-channel traffic. Definition of thepolicies is based on the destination host address and a variety of packet-specific parasuch as protocol and port number.

DCPR qualification occurs before normal routing functions. DCPR enables traffic notqualified for the D channel to be transported over the B channel. For example, periodtransaction requests can be transmitted over the D channel. Other operations, such transmitting inventory transfer data between the same two hosts, are transported oveB channel.

Packets that qualify for D-channel transportation are queued according to priority. If SVC to the destination is up, the packet is encapsulated and sent over the D channeearliest opportunity. If an SVC is not up, the system brings up the circuit and sends tpacket. Packets returning from the host over established SVCs are unencapsulated ato the LAN interface.

Local CommunicationsLocal communications occur between the Cisco 700 series router and a local host ovEthernet link, using one or more of the protocols in the TCP/IP protocol suite. There D-channel-specific limit on the number of POS terminals that can be supported.

POS terminal

Cisco 700

Ethernet segment

ISDN X.25 TPHost

Local communications

TPcommunications

WAN communications

1026

3

X.25 Commands 13-3

Virtual Circuits

re ffic

nts:

is data ed.

the

or

TP Communications ProcessingThis section defines the features the Cisco 700 series router supports for TP/DCP.

Priority Transaction Queuing Priority transaction queuing is provided on a per-SVC (or host) basis. Four queues aavailable for each SVC, providing low, normal, medium, and high-priority queuing. Trais always taken from the highest priority queue first.

Queue assignment is configurable on a per-SVC basis, based on the following eleme

• Protocol (TCP/UDP)

• Protocol port number

• Packet size

The following parameters can be assigned by the user to the router:

• Logical channel number (or range of numbers) to be used by the queue

• Default priority (the default queue)

• The depth of each queue (between 0 and 25 entries with a default of 10)

The router maintains and displays queue usage statistics since the previous reset. This not stored in nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) and is reset if the router is reset or reboot

D-channel Policy RoutingWith D-channel policy routing, you can specify which traffic can be transported over D channel. Four policy definitions are supported, one for each SVC:

• Host (destination) IP address

• Protocol (TCP or UDP)

• Destination socket

• Source socket

Packets that qualify for transport over the D channel are encapsulated and queued ftransmission according to the priority queuing scheme.


WAN Communications

rried rted at

fused

C is ircuit

ork is.

the n over

me

ored t. All

eue. kets.

WAN CommunicationsCommunications over the WAN link, specifically the D-channel packet service, are caon SVCs. (Other X.25 bearer services, such as PVCs and fast packets are not suppothe application layer and therefore are not available.)

The Cisco 700 series router does not accept inbound X.25 calls. Inbound calls are rewith a suitable X.25 call response, such as busy.

A maximum of four concurrent SVCs are supported. An SVC is established when thepresence of qualified data and a configuration are detected. The duration that the SVmaintained (held up) is based on the presence of data and the circuit hold time. The chold time specifies how long an SVC can be maintained without traffic.

The user can specify the destination host X.25 address (X.121 format) and the NetwUser Identifier (NUI) used to place the call. These can be specified on a per-host bas

If the SVC setup fails, the data destined for that SVC is dropped. The event type andreason the SVC was dropped is logged. IP packets are encapsulated for transportatioSVCs in accordance with the Multi-Protocol Over X.25 specification.

Only one SVC is established for an X.25 address. Specifying two policies with the saX.25 address causes both queues to be sent over the same SVC alternately.

StatisticsThe router maintains statistics for traffic and the WAN (SVCs). These statistics are stin RAM and are not maintained if the Cisco 700 series router is power cycled or resestatistical information can be displayed on the console.

Traffic StatisticsThe priority queuing service collects traffic statistics that reflect the usage for each quThis information includes the total packets (per queue) and overflow (discarded) pac

X.25 Commands 13-5

Virtual Circuits

s:

WAN (SVC) StatisticsWAN statistics are collected on the X.25 link and each SVC. This information include

• X.25 link failures

• Inbound call requests

• Other requests

• Outbound calls

• Failed outbound calls (on a per-host basis)

• SVC errors


reset x25d policy

reset x25d policyTo reset the X.25 D channel parameters, use the reset x25d policy command.

REset X25d POlicy LSvc=x | AL l

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesRemoves the policy definition for a specific LSVC or all LSVCs.

ExampleThe following example resets all of the LSVCs:

Host> reset x25d policy all

Related Commandsset x25d policyshow x25d policy

LSvc Reset the logical switched virtual circuit (LSVC) number, where x is an LSVC number from 1 to 4.

AL l Reset all logical switched virtual circuits.

X.25 Commands 13-7

set aodi

ble costs DI

set aodiTo turn AO/DI on, use the set aodi command.

SEt AOdi ON | OFf [NUA=nua] [POwerupenable] [REversechargerequest ON | OFf]

Syntax Description

DefaultOff


Usage GuidelinesThe Always On/Dynamic ISDN (AO/DI) networking service provides an always-availaconnection to packet-based services through the WAN. For the user, AO/DI reduces by using the D channel to make low-speed data transfers. For service providers, AO/removes a significant amount of data traffic from the voice network.

ON AO/DI is configured.

OFf AO/DI is not configured.

NUA The X.121 address of the destination. This is a required parameter if AO/DI is on.

POwerupenable The D channel X.25 SVC established at power up. The SVC is established only for active profiles.

REversechargerequest Reverses the charges (makes a call collect) when set to on. The default is off.


set aodi

and pass

.25 can be

ore w a

nel r the l

nks se. 990.) al

be

all

s

The D channel is an always-available, packet-oriented link between the remote officethe central office. The customer premises equipment (CPE) can use the D channel toMultilink Point-to-Point and TCP/IP protocols encapsulated in X.25. The D-channel Xpackets are handled at the central office by the X.25 packet handler, so these packetsrouted without crossing the circuit-switched switch fabric.

When D-channel bandwidth exceeds a defined threshold, the router places one or mISDN B-channel calls to increase bandwidth. When bandwidth requirements fall belodefined threshold, the B channels are released.

A maximum of four switched virtual circuits (SVCs) can be used for AO/DI. If a D-chanconnection is not available, the router uses the first available B channel for a call. AfteD channel PPP link is established, it is not torn down. If Bandwidth Allocation ControProtocol (BACP) is configured, Bandwidth on Demand (BOD) is negotiated by using BACP.

Performance of the Multilink Protocol declines when the bandwidth of the underlying livaries widely; therefore, the router idles the D channel when the B channels are in u(Packets that can be redirected using the multilink procedure are described in RFC 1After the number of links drops to one and that link is idle, the router returns to normoperation.

To disconnect from the D-channel link, use the disconnect command.

The set link auto on command (where link = D) brings the D channel up on demand. Bydefault the D-channel link is set to OFF.

To configure AO/DI, Multilink PPP has to be configured first. Any available SVC can used for the AO/DI call. The demand and timeout commands configure three links whenAO/DI is configured.

If AO/DI is enabled when a call is made, the channel number for the first link of the cis 3. If AO/DI is disabled, the channel number is 1 or 2.

When configuring the demand command parameters for the D channel, the syntax is afollows:

DEmand D [TH reshold=kbs] [DUration=seconds] [SOurce=LA n | WAn | BOth]

X.25 Commands 13-9

set aodi

s

The default demand command parameters are as follows:

When configuring the timeout command parameters for the D channel, the syntax is afollows:

TI meout D [TH reshold=kbs] [DUration=seconds] [SOurce=LA n | WAn | BOth]

The timeout parameter for the D-channel link is set to off by default.

This feature is available only on the X.25 images.

ExampleThe following example turns AO/DI on for the address of the remote device:

Host> set aodi on nua 14082221000

Related Commandsshow aodishow configshow connectionshow demandshow statusshow timeout

Link Auto Threshold Duration Source

D On 0 kbps 1 LAN

1 On 7.5 kbps1

1 The value of 7.5 kbps for bringing up the first B channel is based on an assumption of 1.5 kbps per SVC. If the queue cannot be cleared in 5 seconds, B-channel bandwidth is used.

1 BOTH

2 On 48 kbps 1 BOTH


set x25

outer

ual

set x25 To set the virtual circuit ranges, use the set x25 command.

SEt X25 [LI c | HI c | LT c | HTc | LOc | HOc] vc_number

Syntax Description

Default The default value for lic, hic, ltc, and htc is 0. The default value for loc and hoc is 1024.

Command Mode System level

Usage Guidelines When you change the virtual circuit ranges, the new values are not effective until the ris rebooted.

The router verifies that the highest virtual circuit number is larger than the lowest virtcircuit number; it sets the highest virtual circuit number first.

LI c Lowest incoming virtual circuit number.

HI c Highest incoming virtual circuit number.

LT c Lowest two-way virtual circuit number.

HTc Highest two-way virtual circuit number.

LOc Lowest outgoing virtual circuit number.

HOc Highest outgoing virtual circuit number.

vc_number Virtual circuit number. Valid value ranges are from 0 to 4095.

X.25 Commands 13-11

set x25

LTC
This command is also available for X.25 over the D channel; therefore, the values ofand HTC must match the LSVC number.
Example The following example sets hoc and loc to 1024:

Host> set X25 hoc 1024 Host> set X25 loc 1024

Related Commandsset x25dshow x25


set x25d

X.25

set x25dTo set the host parameters to perform the TCP/IP relay function between Ethernet andD channel connections, use the set x25d command.

SEt X25d LSvc=x NUA=nua [NUI=nui] IDle=xxx

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe command adds an entry to the X.25 D channel host table. Up to four entries areallowed.

LSvc Logical switched virtual circuit (LSVC) number, where x is an LSVC number from 1 to 4.

NUA Network X.121 address.

NUI Network user identifier, from 1 to 15 digits.

ID le Hold-time in seconds before the X.25 link shuts down because there is no traffic.

X.25 Commands 13-13

set x25d

n idle

ExampleThe following example sets the network user address for LSVC 1 to 100102 and sets atime of 60 seconds:

Host> set x25d lsvc= 1 nua= 100102 idle= 60

Related Commandsreset x25d policyset x25d policyshow x25d policy


set x25d policy

vide

ricted oes

t

set x25d policyTo route a specific IP packet to the target IP host through an X.25 D channel and prothe parameters needed for a X.25 D channel connection, use the set x25d policy command.

SEt X25d POlicy LSvc=x HOst IP address [TCP | UDP | ICMP] [Port xx] [REversechargerequest ON | OFf]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe connection between the electronic point of sale (POS) site and the router is restto LAN Ethernet TCP/IP; T3POS/TPAD implementation is not available. The router dnot require knowledge of POS transaction formats or protocols.

LSvc Logical switched virtual circuit (LSVC) number, where x is an LSVC number from 1 to 4).

HOst IP address IP address of the host.

TCP, UDP, and ICMP Protocols supported by the X.25 D channel.

Port xx Port number, where xx is the port number. (See the “Port Assignments and NetBIOS Names” appendix for a list of pornumbers.)

REversechargerequest Makes X.25 calls collect calls (added in software Release 4.2(3.5)).

X.25 Commands 13-15

set x25d policy

for to the

the

The software supports four policy definitions, one for each LSVC. Packets that qualifytransport over the D channel are encapsulated and queued for transmission accordingpriority queuing scheme.

ExampleThe following example sets the policy host IP address to 10.10.10.1, using TCP andTelnet port (23).

Host> set x25d policy host ip 10.10.10.1 TCP port 23

Related Commandsreset x25d policyset x25d set x25d teishow x25d policy


set x25d priorityqueue

IP

set x25d priorityqueue To specify a subprotocol and port number within IP packets or to assign a priority to packets greater than or less than a specific size, use the set x25d priorityqueue command.

SEt X25d PRiorityqueue LSvc=x IP [HI gh | MEdium | NOrmal | LOw] [TCP | UDP | ICMP [Port xx]] | [PKtsize GReater | LEssthan xxxx] | [DEfault HI gh | MEdium | NOrmal | LOw]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


LSvc Logical switched virtual circuit (LSVC) number, where x is the LSVC number (1 through 4).

IP Priority level (high, medium, normal [default], and low).

TCP, UDP, and ICMP

Protocols supported by the X.25 D channel.

Port Port number, where xx is the port number. (See the “Port Assignmentsand NetBIOS Names” appendix for a list of port numbers.)

PKtsize Size of the packet. GReater than the value in xxxx or LEssthan the value in xxxx.

DEfault Default priority (high, medium, normal [default], and low) for a logical switched virtual circuit (LSVC).

X.25 Commands 13-17

set x25d priorityqueue

ht into e

Usage GuidelinesPriority queueing improves the responsiveness of the D channel link. X.25 is a flow-controlled, nonbroadcast multiaccess (NBMA) protocol. A high-priority packet mignot be transmitted first, even when it is eligible. With priority queueing, data can be putone of the four priority queues: high, medium, normal, and low. Packets with the sampriority are sent on a first-in-first-out basis.

ExampleThe following sets the priority for IP packets greater than 1024 to a low priority for LSVC 1:

Host> set x25d priorityqueue lsvc=1 ip low pksize greater 1024

Related Commandsset x25d priorityqueue lsvc defaultset x25d priorityqueue lsvc limitshow x25d priorityqueue


set x25d tei

e ted.

set x25d teiTo set the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) number, use the set x25d tei command.

SEt X25d TEI [ON | OFf | nnn]

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesIf set to OFF, there is no X.25 D channel support. If set to ON, the value is 255; the centraloffice assigns the TEI number dynamically. If nnn is less than 255 and greater than 0, thvalue for nnn is assigned to TEI. This command is not effective until the router is reboo

ExampleThe following example sets the TEI number to 2:

Host> set x25d tei 2

ON TEI has a value of 255.

OFf TEI has a value of 0.

nnn TEI number or the support level.

X.25 Commands 13-19

set x25d tei

Related Commandsreset x25d policyset x25d policyshow x25d policy


set x25d priorityqueue lsvc limit

it

or

set x25d priorityqueue lsvc limitTo specify the limit (maximum depth) of the queue for a logical switched virtual circu(LSVC), use the set x25d priorityqueue lsvc limit command.

SEt X25d PRiorityqueue LSvc=x LI mit HI gh | MEdium | NOrmal | LOw xx

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


ExampleThe following example limits to 20 the number of packets the normal priority queue fLVSC 1 can have:

Host> set x25d priorityqueue lsvc= 1 limit normal 20

Related Commandsset x25d priorityqueue defaultset x25d priorityqueue ipshow x25d priorityqueue

LSvc LSVC number, where x is the LSVC number (1 through 4).

LI mit Priority of any packet not previously assigned a priority (high, medium, normal, or low).

LOw Depth (maximum number of packets) a queue can have.

X.25 Commands 13-21

set x25d x121host

s the must t be o

not TPAD

set x25d x121hostTo change the X.121 address, use the set x25d x121host command.

SEt X25d X121host address

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesThe X.121 address can be added to packets sent over the D channel. This address icalling DTE address for all X.25 D channel packets. The length of the X.121address not be greater than 16 decimal digits. After setting the X.121address, the router musrebooted for the change to take effect. The set defaults command sets the X.121address tan empty string.

The X.121 address is used only for X.25 D channel. The X.25 B channel packets do contain the X.121 address because calling DTE address suppression is required for operations (on X.25 over the B channel).

ExampleThe following example sets an X.121 address:

host> set x25d x121host 1234567890

address Data terminal equipment (DTE) X121 host address.


set x25d x121host

Related Commandsset defaultsupload

X.25 Commands 13-23

show aodi

show aodiTo display the parameters for AO/DI, use the show aodi command.

SHow AOdi


ExampleThe following example displays the AO/DI parameters:

Host> show aodi AODI ON or OFFNUA 686887987REVERSE CHARGE REQUEST ON or OFF

Related Commandsshow configshow connectionshow demandshow statusshow timeout


show x25

, and

show x25 To display the X.25 parameters, use the show x25 command.

SHow X25

Default None

Command Mode System or profile mode

Usage Guidelines The output shows whether or not X.25 was initialized properly, the mode of operationthe virtual circuit ranges.

ExampleThe following example shows the output of the command:

Host> show x25X25 is running in DTE MODE. VC Ranges - current value (new value after reboot): lic 0 (0), hic 0 (0), ltc 0 (0), htc 0 (0), loc 1024 (1024), hoc 1024 (1024)

Related Commandsreset x25d policyset x25set x25dshow x25d policy

X.25 Commands 13-25

show x25d policy

show x25d policyTo show the X.25 D channel parameters, use the show x25d policy command.

SHow X25d POlicy

DefaultNone



Host> show x25d policyLSVC NUA NUI IP Address Prot Port Idle Reverse ------------------------------------------------------------------------1 12345678901234 192.168.253.128 ALL 1234 3000 ON 2 12345678901234 192.168.253.128 ALL 0 3000 OFF3 12345678901234 192.168.253.128 ALL 0 3000 OFF4 12345678901234 192.168.253.128 ALL 0 3000 OFF

Related Commandsreset x25d policyset x25dset x25d policy


show x25d priorityqueue

IPX,

show x25d priorityqueueTo show the configuration statistics of priority queues, use the show x25d priorityqueue command.

SHow X25d PRiorityqueue COnfig | STatistics

Syntax Description

DefaultNone


Usage GuidelinesPriority queue is only available to IP (and its subprotocols); other protocols, such as are not supported.

ExamplesThe following example shows the configuration output of the command:

Host> show x25d priorityqueue config LSVC 1 Default Priority NORMALPriority Queue Protocol Options Max Size Drops---------------------------------------------------------------------HIGH IP 4 0 0MEDIUM IP 4 0 0NORMAL IP 4 0 0LOW IP 4 0 0

COnfig Show the configuration.

STatistics Show the statistics.

X.25 Commands 13-27

show x25d priorityqueue

LSVC 2 Default Priority NORMALPriority Queue Protocol Options Max Size Drops---------------------------------------------------------------------HIGH IP 4 0 0MEDIUM IP 4 0 0NORMAL IP 4 0 0LOW IP 4 0 0

The following example shows the statistical output of the command:

Host> show x25d priorityqueue statistics LSVC NUA NUI IP Address Protocol Port Idle-----------------------------------------------------------------------1 14085763301 192.168.100.1 ALL 0 602 14085763301 192.168.100.3 ALL 0 120

Related Commandsset x25d priorityqueue defaultset x25d priorityqueue ipset x25d priorityqueue limit


show x25d statistics

show x25d statisticsTo show the statistics for X.25 D channel, use the show x25d statistics command.

SHow X25d STatistics

DefaultNone



Host> show x25d statisticsLSVC 1Outbound Requests: 0Outbound Failed: 0SVC Errors: 0Out Packets: 0In Packets: 0LSVC 2Outbound Requests: 0Outbound Failed: 0SVC Errors: 0Out Packets: 0In Packets: 0

Related Commandsreset x25d policyset x25dset x25d policy

X.25 Commands 13-29

show x25d tei

show x25d teiTo show the terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) number, use the show x25d tei command.

SHow X25d TEi

DefaultNone



Host> show x25d teiTEI 255

Related Commandsreset x25d policyset x25dset x25d tei


show X25d X121host

d using

show X25d X121host The X.121 address can be added to packets sent over the D channel using the set x25d x121host x121address command. To view the X.121 address set in the router, use the show x25d x121host command.

Syntax show X25d X121host


Usage GuidelinesThis command shows the X.121 host address. The value of the X.121 address enterethe command set x25d x121host command.

ExampleThe following example displays the x121host address:

700> show x25d x121hostX25D X121HOST 14081763269

Related Commandset x25d x121host

X.25 Commands 13-31

show X25d X121host


Ethernet Packet Types

A P P E N D I X
A
Ethernet Packet Types
ld a most and
The Ethernet Type field contains a hexadecimal number that you can interpret to yiesymbolic Ethernet protocol type name. The Ethernet Packet Types dialog box lists thecommonly used packet types. It also lists some of the major Ethernet protocol typestheir descriptions.

Table A-1 shows the Ethernet packet types.

Table A-1 Ethernet Packet Types

Hexadecimal Description

8731-8738 Cisco Systems Inc. Combinet Packet Protocol (CPP)

0000-05DC IEEE 802.3 length field

0101-01FF Experimental (for development; conflicts with 802.3 length fields)

0200 Xerox PUP (Conflicts with 802.3 length fields)

0201 PUP address translation (Conflicts with 802.3 length fields)

0600 Xerox XNS IDP

0800 DoD IP

0801 X.75 Internet

0802 NBS Internet

0803 ECMA Internet

0804 CHAOSnet

0805 X.25 Level 3

0806 ARP (for IP and for CHAOS)

A-1

0807 XNS Compatibility

081C Symbolics Private

0888-088A Xyplex

0900 UB Networks Debugger

0A00 Xerox 802.3 PUP Address Translation

0BAD Banyan Systems

1000 Berkeley Trailer negotiation

1001-100F Berkeley Trailer encapsulation

1600 VALID

4242 PCS Basic Block Protocol

5208 BBN Simnet Private

6000 DEC Unassigned

6001 DEC MOP dump/load assistance

6002 DEC MOP remote console

6003 DEC DECnet Phase IV

6004 DEC LAT

6005 DEC DECNet diagnostics

6006 DEC DECNet customer use

6007 DEC DECNet SCA

6009 DEC unassigned

6010-6014 3Com Corp.

7000 Ungermann-Bass download

7001 UB NIU

7002 UB NIU

7020-7029 LRT (England)

7030 Proteon

Table A-1 Ethernet Packet Types (continued)


Cisco700 Series Router Command ReferenceA-2

8003 Cronus VLN

8004 Cronus Direct

8005 HP Probe protocol

8006 Nestar

8008 AT&T

8010 Excelan

8013 SGI diagnostic type (obsolete)

8014 SGI network games (obsolete)

8015 SGI reserved type (obsolete)

8016 SGI “bounce server” (obsolete)

8019 Apollo

802E Tymshare

802F Tigan, Inc.

8035 Reverse ARP

8036 Aeonic Systems

8038 DEC LANBridge

8039 DEC unassigned

803A DEC unassigned

803B DEC unassigned

803C DEC unassigned

803D DEC Ethernet CSMA/CD Encryption Protocol

803E DEC unassigned

803F DEC LAN traffic monitor

8040 DEC unassigned

8041 DEC unassigned

8042 DEC unassigned



Ethernet Packet Types A-3

8044 Planning Research Corp.

8046 AT&T

8047 AT&T

8049 ExperData (France)

805B Versatile Message Translation Protocol RFC-1045 (Stanford)

805C Stanford V Kernel production

805D Evans and Sutherland

8060 Little Machines

8062 Counterpart Computer

8065 University of Massachusetts, Amherst

8066 University of Massachusetts, Amherst

8067 Veeco Integrated Automation

8068 General Dynamics

8069 AT&T

806A Autophon (Switzerland)

806C ComDesign

806D Compugraphic Corp.

806E-8077 Landmark Graphics Corp.

807A Matra (France)

807B Dansk Data Elektronic A/S (Denmark)

807C Merit Internodal

807D VitaLink Communications

807E VitaLink Communications

807F VitaLink Communications

8080 VitaLink Communications

8081 Counterpoint Computers






8088 Xyplex

8089 Xyplex

808A Xyplex

809B Kinetics Ethertalk-Appletalk over Ethernet

809C Datability

809Î Datability

809E Datability

809F Spider Systems, Ltd. (England)

80A3 Nixdorf Computer (West Germany)

80A4-80B3 Siemens Gammasonics Inc.

80C0 Digital Communications Assoc.




80C6 Pacer Software

80C7 Applitek Corp.

80C8-80CC Integraph Corp.

80CD Harris Corp.

80CE Harris Corp.

80CF-80D2 Taylor Inst.

80D3 Rosemount Corp.

80D4 Rosemount Corp.

80D5 IBM SNA Services over Ethernet

80DD Varian Assoc.



Ethernet Packet Types A-5

80DE Integrated Solutions TRFS(Transparent Remote File System)

80DF Integrated Solutions

80E0 Allen-Bradley

80E3 Allen-Bradley

80E4-80F0 Datability

80F2 Retix

80F3 Kinetics, Appletalk ARP (AARP)

80F4 Kinetics

80F5 Kinetics

80F7 Apollo Computer

80FF-8103 Wellfleet Communications

8107 Symbolics Private



8130 Waterloo Microsystems

8131 VG Laboratory Systems

8137 Novell (old) NetWare IPX (ECONFIG E Option)

8138 Novell

8139-813D KTI

9000 Loopback (Configuration Test Protocol)

9001 Bridge Communications XNS Systems Mgmt.

9002 Bridge Communications XNS Systems Mgmt.

9003 Bridge Communications

FF00 BBN VITAL LAN Bridge cache wakeup




Port Assignments and NetBIOS Names

A P P E N D I X
B
Port Assignments and NetBIOS Names

P st. is the o t field

Every application that intends to receive data from a TCP/IP network calls the TCP/Iservice to acquire a port, a 16-bit number unique to that application on that particular hoAny well-formed incoming datagram with that port number in its TCP or UDP headerdelivered to that application. Fragmented datagrams only contain port information in first datagram fragment (fragment 0). By convention, any transmitting application alsowns a port number on its host, and it supplies that port number in the destination porof the datagrams it sends.

TCP Port AssignmentsTable B-1 lists the TCP port assignment for each port.

Table B-1 TCP Port Assignments

Port Keyword Protocol

7 ECHO Echo

9 DISCARD Discard

11 USERS Active Users

13 DAYTIME Daytime

17 QUOTE Quote of the Day

19 CHARGEN Character Generator

20 FTP-DATA File Transfer (Default Data)

21 FTP File Transfer (Control)

23 TELNET Telnet

B-1

UDP Port Assignments

UDP Port AssignmentsTable B-2 lists the UDP port assignment for each port.

25 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer

37 TIME Time

43 NICNAME Who Is

53 DOMAIN Domain Name Server

79 FINGER Finger

101 HOSTNAME NIC Host Name Server

103 X400 X400

104 X400-SND X400-SND

113 AUTH Authentication Service

117 UUCP-PATH UUCP Path Service

119 NNTP USENET Network News Transfer Protocol

512 rexec UNIX rexec (Control)

513 rlogin UNIX rlogin

514 rsh UNIX rsh and rcp

515 printer UNIX Line Printer Remote Spooling

Table B-2 UDP Port Assignments


7 ECHO Echo

9 DISCARD Discard

13 DAYTIME Daytime

19 CHARGEN Character Generator

Table B-1 TCP Port Assignments (continued)


Cisco700 Series Router Command ReferenceB-2

UDP Port Assignments

37 TIME Time

39 RLP Resource Location Protocol

42 NAMESERVER Host Name Server

43 NICNAME Who Is

49 LOGIN Login Host Protocol

53 DOMAIN Domain Name Server

67 BOOTPS Bootstrap Protocol Server

68 BOOTPC Bootstrap Protocol Client

69 TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol

111 SUNRPC SUN Remote Procedure Call

123 NTP Network Time Protocol

126 SNMP Simple Network Mgmt. Protocol

137 NETBIOS-NS NETBIOS Name Service

138 NETBIOS-DGM NETBIOS Datagram Service

139 NETBIOS-SSN NETBIOS Session Service

161 SNMP Simple Network Mgmt. Protocol Q/R

162 SNMP-TRAP SNMP Event Traps

513 rwho UNIX Broadcast Naming Service

514 syslog UNIX System Log

517 talk Two User Interaction

520 RIP Routing Information Protocol

525 timed Time Server

Table B-2 UDP Port Assignments (continued)


Port Assignments and NetBIOS Names B-3

NetBios Names

t, racter he al

NetBios NamesThe NetBIOS naming convention allows 16 characters in a NetBIOS name. Microsofhowever, limits the number of NetBIOS names to 15 characters and uses the 16th chaas a NetBIOS suffix. The NetBIOS suffix is used by Microsoft Networking software toidentify functionality installed on the registered device. Cisco Systems has adopted tMicrosoft NetBIOS naming convention, as a 16th byte of a NetBIOS name is a specicharacter reserved for the suffix.

Table B-3 lists the NetBIOS suffixes used by Microsoft Windows NT. The suffixes arelisted in hexadecimal format because many of them are unprintable otherwise.

Table B-3 NetBIOS Names

Name Number(h) Type 1 Usage

<computername> 00 U Workstation Service.

<computername> 01 U Messenger Service.

<computername> 03 U Messenger service name used when receiving and sending messages. This is the name that is registered with the WINS server as the messenger service on the WINS client and is usually appended to the computer name and to the name of the user currently logged on to the computer.

<computername> 06 U RAS Server Service.

<domain> 1B U Domain Master Browser, which clients and browsers use to contact the domain master browser.

<domain> 1D U Clients resolve this name to access the master browser for server lists. There is one master browser on a subnet.

<computername> 1F U NetDDE service.

<computername> 20 U File Server Service.

<computername> 21 U RAS Client Service.

<computername> BE U Network Monitor Agent.


NetBios Names

n

<computername> BF U Network Monitor Application.

<domain> 00 G Domain Name.

<\\--__MSBROWSE__> 01 G The name master browsers broadcast to othe local subnet to announce their domains to other master browser. WINS handles this name by returning the broadcast address FFFFFFFF.

<domain> 1C G This group name contains a list of the specific addresses of systems that have registered the name. The domain controllers register this name.

<domain> 1E G Browsers broadcast to this name and listenon it to elect a master browser. The broadcast is done on the local subnet and should not cross routers.

<groupname> 20 G A special group name that is registered with WINS servers to identify groups of computers for administrative purposes. For example, “printersg” could be a registered group name used to identify an administrative group of print servers.

1 U means Unique, G means Group.

Table B-3 NetBIOS Names (continued)

Name Number(h) Type 1 Usage

Port Assignments and NetBIOS Names B-5

NetBios Names


I N D E X

Numerics

5ESS Custom switch 5-1

A

active, set command 3-4address

field descriptions (table) 8-24negotiation 6-32set command 8-7set ip address command 6-25set ipx network address command 7-16show command 8-23

age, set command 8-9A-law voice encoding 5-21alawvoice, set command 5-21Always On/Dynamic ISDN

See AO/DIanalog telephone

port 5-1confirming directory numbers 5-37SPIDs 5-2

analog telephone ports 5-2analog telephone services

data over voice (VBC) 5-3analog-to-analog calls 11-5AO/DI, set command 12-8AO/DI, show command 12-24approximate software load time (table) 2-51arguments 6-28ARP 1-1associating a directory number with a SPID 5-37AT commands 2-27authentication 9-1

ppp set command 9-5set ppp authentication accept command 9-8

authentication service C-2auto mode 5-50auto, set command 5-22auto-config

Auto_Config flag 2-20autodetection, set command 5-24

B

B channel 5-13, 9-12backup number, set command 5-27BACP 12-9

set ppp bacp command 9-10Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol (BACP)

See BACPBandwidth Allocation Protocol (BAP)

See also DTMF commandsSee BAP

Bandwidth on Demand 12-9bandwidth requirements 12-9BAP 9-10basic telephone service 5-2baudrate, set command 2-13, 13-7BC 5-50BCP 1-1Bearer Capability

See BCBOOTP protocol 2-20bridge filtering

set learn command 8-13set pattern command 8-17set type command 8-20

bridging 4-2, 8-7loop 5-39set bridging command 8-10transparent 8-1

broadcast 6-43, 8-14, 8-21

Index 1

C

call bumping 9-12call command 5-6call duration

set command 2-15show command 2-37

call negotiation 9-1call time

set calltime command 2-16call waiting

set command 5-30, 11-4callback authentication 4-22callback request 9-15callback security 9-14caller ID

set callerid command 4-6caller id

set caller id receive number command 4-9caller id checking 4-9calls

data over voiceincoming 5-4outgoing 5-4See also DOV

disconnecting automatically 5-4call-time limits 2-38calltime, show command 2-38caution description xixcd command 2-2Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol

See CHAPchange user command 2-2changing profiles 2-2channel

bumping 5-60directory number 11-6set auto command 5-22set dtmf spid command 11-12show status command 5-62

Cisco 700 Series Router Command RefIndex 2

SPID 5-14WAN 5-7, 5-11

CHAP 1-2, 4-22description 9-1host secret 9-5password 9-31PPP authentication 9-31set ppp tas chapsecret local command 9-35show security command 4-22supported protocol 1-2

CHAP, description 9-1Cisco Fast Step 1-3Cisco IOS

software 6-53Cisco IOS-700 software 1-2Cisco Remote Office routers 8-7Cisco Small Office Home Office

See SOHOclient

set command 9-19coldstart 10-7combining channels 5-54command reference fields xxcompression

set compression command 2-18conference, set command 5-31configuration

Auto_Config flag 2-20directory numbers for analog voice services 5-1filter 8-12loading 2-54options 1-3port 1-3set serial port command 2-27show command 2-39show ip configuration command 6-63show ipx configuration command 7-33Telnet 1-3terminal baud rate 2-50Web sources xvii

configuration guide xvi

erence

configuringbasic telephone service port 11-15central office switch 5-54internal profile subnet mask 11-10IPX routing 7-1ISDN calling 5-1on-demand dialing 5-1PPP parameters 9-1router security 4-1security 5-1SMNP parameters 10-1SNMP trap 10-7static IP route 6-56transparent bridging

address learning 8-1filtering 8-1

connection 5-6show command 2-41

contact, set command 10-3Controller PAD (TPAD) 2-27cost, set command 6-26country group, set command 5-32country groups and ring cadence duration (table) 5-3creating profiles 2-2

D

D channellow-speed data transfers 12-8

D channel packet-based service 12-2D Channel Policy Routing (DCPR) 12-3data

path 5-10rate 5-64transfer 7-12

data callsauto 5-27

data over voiceSee DOV

3

Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)X121 12-22

datagram, fragment C-1daughter board, types and countries (table) 2-60DCP

displaying diagnostic information 13-5message format 13-5

default gateway 7-14default values 2-20delay, set command 5-34demand

command 5-8show command 2-42show ipx demand command 7-37

destination network address 6-56Device Control Protocol

See DCPDHCP 6-2

gateway, set dhcp gateway command 6-15netbios_scope, set command 6-19relay

agent 6-7reset command 6-2set command 6-7set dhcp address command 6-10set dhcp command 6-7set dhcp dns command 6-12set dhcp domain command 6-14set dhcp leasetime command 6-17set dhcp netmask command 6-20set dhcp wins commands 6-22show dhcp config command 6-60subnet mask 6-20supported protocol 1-2

diag rcapi command 13-5dial prefix (TPAD) 2-28directory number 5-18

RCAPIresetting 13-7setting 13-9

reset command 5-16

Index 3

set command 5-36set dtmf directory number command 11-5set phone command 5-44

directory numbersanalog telephone ports 5-2analog voice calls 5-1analog voice service 5-1associating with SPIDs 5-1confirming analog telephone port 5-37

disable echoing commands (TPAD) 2-28disconnect command 5-10disconnecting calls 5-4Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

(DVMRP) 6-33Distinctive Ring Manager 5-5distinguishing RCAPI calls 13-9DMS-100 5-14DMS-100 Custom 5-25DNS

set dhcp dns command 6-12document

conventions xviidocumentation xvidocumentation CD-ROM xviDomain Name System

See DNSdomain, DHCP

set dhcp domain command 6-14DOV 5-44, 5-50

enabling 5-4incoming calls 5-4outgoing calls 5-4

downloadTFTP 2-49

DTEaddress suppression 12-22

DTMF commandsconventions 11-1set dtmf cancel call waiting 11-4set dtmf directory number 11-5set dtmf disable dial terminator 11-7


set dtmf gateway 11-8set dtmf ip address 11-9set dtmf ip netmask 11-10set dtmf number 11-11set dtmf spid 11-12set dtmf switch 11-14

Dual Tone MultifrequencySee DTMF commands

dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) 4-10Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

See DHCP

E

enable echoing commands (TPAD) 2-28establish command 5-12, 5-14Ethernet 5-44, 8-2, 8-21

address 3-13connection 4-3framing 7-34packet type 8-21, 8-29, B-1protocol types B-1set type command 8-20show ethernet command 8-25

Ethernet_II 6-32

F

fall-back order 9-9fast packet 12-5File Transport Protocol

See FTPfilter

ID number 8-3, 8-26patterns 8-5reset command 7-4, 8-3set command 6-27set filter command 8-11

erence

set unicast filtering command 8-22show command 6-66, 7-38show filter command 8-26

filtering table 8-2fixed parameters 2-33, 2-34force factory defaults (TPAD) 2-28framing

set command 6-32, 7-12FTP server 6-40

G

gateway 8-24reset command 7-5reset ip route 6-5set command 6-24, 7-14set dhcp gateway command 6-15set dtmf gateway command 11-8

gateway address 6-15

H

HDLC 2-18help command 2-3High Level Data Link Control

See HDLChost address 7-6, 7-24host secret password 9-5

I

ICMP 1-1, 6-27identification number 6-4image (software) 1-3inactive, set command 3-6inactivity timer 4-13

Inbound VoicePriority Modes 5-60installation guide xviIntegrated Services Digital Network

See ISDNintegrity packets 9-26internal tones, set command 5-38Internet Control Message Protocol

See ICMPInternet Group Membership Protocol (IGMP) 6-33Internet Packet Exchange Control Protocol

See IPXCPInternet Protocol

See IPInternet Protocol Control Protocol

See IPCPInternetwork Packet Exchange

See IPXIP

configuration 6-63field descriptions 6-64

DHCPreset DHCP address command 6-2

filter 6-29, 6-66filter field descriptions 6-67gateway address 6-24multicast 6-33

set command 6-33time to live 6-33

packets 6-32RIP 6-53RIP Version 6-50route 6-56

field descriptions 6-73reset command 6-5

routing 6-58See also IP commands 6-4static route 6-5, 6-72

IP commandsreset dhcp address 6-2reset ip filter 6-4reset ip pat porthandler 6-6

Index 5

reset ip route 6-5set dhcp 6-7set dhcp address 6-10set dhcp dns 6-12set dhcp domain 6-14set dhcp gateway 6-15set dhcp leasetime command 6-17set dhcp netbios_scope 6-19set dhcp netmask 6-20set dhcp win 6-22set gateway 6-24set ip address 6-25set ip cost 6-26set ip filter 6-27set ip framing 6-32set ip multicast 6-33set ip netmask 6-36set ip pat 6-37set ip pat porthandler 6-38set ip pat tcptimeout 6-41set ip pat udptimeout 6-42set ip propagate 6-43set ip rip receive 6-44set ip rip snapshot client 6-45set ip rip snapshot server 6-48set ip rip summarization 6-50set ip rip time command 6-51set ip rip update 6-52set ip rip version 6-55set ip route 6-56set ip routing command 6-58set netbios name spoofing 6-34set subnet mask 6-59show dhcp config 6-60show ip configuration 6-63show ip filter command 6-66show ip pat 6-68show ip rip snapshot 6-69show ip rip time command 6-71show ip route 6-72show netbios name 6-74


IPCP 6-32supported protocol 1-1

IPX 7-16commands

See also Novell IPX commandsdefault routes 7-14network address 7-16Novell IPX commands 7-1Novell IPX Router Specification

107–000029–001 7-27ping 7-2reset ipx filter command 7-4SAP types 7-30set IPX trace command 2-23spoofing, defined 7-31

IPX commandsSee Novell IPX commands

ipx configurations, show command 7-33ipx connections

show command 7-35ipx filter, set command 7-10ipx routing, enable and disable 7-26IPXCP 7-12

supported protocol 1-1ipxping command 7-2IPXPING.NLM 7-2IPXRTR.EXE 7-2ISDN 4-9

B channel 5-49call 5-6, 5-8, 5-34caller ID authentication 4-6connection 5-34, 6-34directory numbers 11-5line 5-8line (S-Bus) 5-14messages 5-50multipoint line 5-48service provider 5-36switch types 5-50, 5-55traffic 5-8X.25 encapsulation 12-1

erence

ISDN commandscall 5-6demand 5-8disconnect 5-10establish 5-12release 5-14reset directory number 5-16reset phone 5-18set alawvoice 5-21set aoctimeout 5-19set auto 5-22set autodetection command 5-24set backup number 5-27set button 5-28set callwaiting 5-30set conference command 5-31set countrygroup 5-32set delay 5-34set directory number 5-36set internaltones 5-38set multidestination 5-39set number 5-40set phone 5-44set plan 5-46set ringback number 5-48set speed 5-50set spid 5-52set switch 5-54set timeout 5-56set transfer command 5-58set voicepriority mode 5-59show status 5-62show voicerouting 5-63timeout 5-64unset permanent command 5-66

L

LAPB 2-33

learn, set command 8-13lease time

set dhcp leasetime command 6-17leased line 6-2

connection 9-6LED

DTMF 11-1LINE 2-51

LINE LED 2-51Link 5-7, 5-34link drop 9-12loading the configuration 2-54location, set command 10-5log command 2-5logical channel number 12-1login command 4-2logout command 4-3, 4-4logout, set command 4-13loopback, set command 2-24

M

MAC address 7-36, 8-10Media Access Control

See MAC addressmemory

show command 2-43memstat, show command 2-43message format, DCP 13-5MLPPP

supported protocol 1-1mode, set command 8-14Mu-Law voice encoding 5-21multicast

filtering 8-21packets 8-14set command 6-33time to live 6-33

multidestination dialing

Index 7

disable 5-39enable 5-39

multilink 9-23PPP negotiation 9-23set command 9-21, 9-23

Multilink Point-to-Point ProtocolSee MLPPP

multiple channels 9-23multiplexing 5-7, 5-11multipoint ISDN line 11-5

N

NBMA 12-18NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) 6-19negotiation

set command 9-25show command 9-39

NET3 5-21NetBIOS 7-34

computer name 6-19name spoofing, set command 6-34name spoofing, show command 6-74names C-4packets 7-15scope 6-19set command 7-15

netbios_scope, set DHCP command 6-19netmask

set command 6-36set dtmf ip netmask command 11-10set ppp ip netmask local command 9-29

NetWare Loadable ModuleSee NLM

NetWare server 7-2network address 6-56Network Management Station

See NMSNetwork User Address (NUA) 2-34


Network User Information (NUI) 2-34network, IPX 7-6nexthop 6-56NI1 5-25NI2 5-25NLM 7-2NMS 7-9non-broadcast multi-access protocol (NBMA)

See NBMA 12-18note, description xviiiNovell

IPX format ping 7-2IPX Router Specification 107–000029–001 7-27

Novell IPX commandsipxping 7-2reset ipx filter command 7-4reset ipx gateway 7-5reset ipx route 7-6reset ipx sap helper 7-7reset ipx service 7-8set ipx filter command 7-10set ipx framing 7-12set ipx gateway 7-14set ipx netbios 7-15set ipx network address 7-16set ipx rip receive 7-17set ipx rip snapshot client 7-18set ipx rip snapshot server 7-20set ipx rip update 7-22set ipx route 7-24set ipx routing 7-26set ipx sap helper 7-27set ipx service 7-29set ipx spoofing 7-31show ipx configuration 7-33show ipx connections 7-35show ipx demand 7-37show ipx filter 7-38show ipx rip snapshot 7-39show ipx route 7-41show ipx service 7-43

erence

show ipx statistics 7-45number, set command 5-40numbering type 5-46NVRAM 2-20, 8-8, 12-4

SAP filters 7-11

O

on-demand dialing 5-1, 5-9, 5-11, 5-22, 5-34operating system (router) 1-1outbound voice priority modes 5-60overview of Cisco 700 series routers 1-1

P

packet counts 2-12Packet Exchange Control Protocol

See IPXCPpacket types

Ethernet 8-20icmp 6-27icmprd 6-27icmpxrd 6-27tcp 6-27tcpsyn 6-27tcpxsyn 6-27udp 6-27

packetsbroadcast 8-21multicast 8-21NetBIOS 7-15reset command 2-12RIP 6-44RIP receive 6-44RIP version 6-55show command 2-45test 2-55unicast 8-21

PAD support 2-34PAP

authenticationpassword 9-31

description 9-1host password 4-22supported protocol 1-1

PAP, description 9-2passthru, set command 8-16password 2-58

authentication 9-31encrypted 9-1host secret 9-5set command 4-14, 9-31

Password Authentication ProtocolSee PAP

PATreset ip pat porthandler command 6-6set ip pat command 6-37set ip pat porthandler command 6-38set ip pat tcptimeout command 6-41set ip pat udptimeout command 6-42show ip pat command 6-68

patternset command 8-5, 8-17show command 8-27

permanent connectionsunset permanent command 5-66

permanent virtual circuits 12-1phone

interface 5-44reset command 5-18set command 5-44

pingcommand 2-9ipxping command 7-2

plain old telephone service (POTS) 11-1plan, set command 5-46point of sale 12-15point-of-sale system 2-28

Index 9

Point-to-Point ProtocolSee PPP

policyreset x25d policy command 12-7set x25d policy command 12-15show x25d policy command 12-26

Port Address TranslationSee PAT

port assignmentsTCP C-1UDP C-2

porthandlerreset ip pat porthandler command 6-6set command 6-38

portsanalog telephone 5-2

POTS portsSee basic telephone service and analog telephone

PPP 2-30authentication 9-1, 9-31CHAP authentication, description 9-1links 9-23log command 2-6magic number 9-21multilink 9-23PAP authentication, description 9-2supported protocol 1-1

PPP authenticationleased line 9-6

PPP commandsset compression 2-18set ppp address negotiation 9-3set ppp authentication 9-5set ppp authentication accept command 9-8set ppp bacp 9-10set ppp callback command 9-14set ppp chaprefuse command 9-17set ppp clientname 9-19set ppp ip netmask local command 9-29set ppp magicnumbercheck 9-21set ppp multilink 9-23


set ppp negotiation count 9-25set ppp negotiation integrity 9-26set ppp negotiation retry 9-28set ppp password 9-31set ppp tas client command 9-36set ppp terminate count 9-38set ppp termreq command 9-38show negotiation 9-39show negotiation command 9-39

PPP encapsulation 9-1priority queue

set x25d priorityqueue command 12-17set x25d priorityqueue lsvc limit command 12-21show x25d priorityqueue command 12-27

priority queueing 12-18profile commands

reset user 3-2set active 3-4set inactive 3-6set profile 3-8set profile id 3-10set user 3-11show profile 3-13unset 3-14

profile id, set command 3-10profile mode 6-53profile template 2-35profiles

address configuration 8-23case-sensitivity 2-2changing or creating 2-2configuring 3-1show command 3-13WAN 6-53

propagate, set command 6-43Protocol Independence Multicast (PIM)

PIM 6-33protocols supported 1-1pulse dial (TPAD) 2-28

erence

Q

queues, switched virtual circuit 12-4quick reference xvi

R

RAM 2-43RCAPI

diag rcapi command 13-5displaying diagnostic information 13-5distinguishing call types 13-9reset rcapi number command 13-7set rcapi command 13-8set rcapi number command 13-9set rcapi server port command 13-11show rcapi status command 13-12TCP port assignment 13-11

reboot command 2-11release command 5-14release notes for Cisco IOS 700 software xviremote access, set command 4-17Remote CAPI

See RCAPIreset address command 8-2reset caller id command 4-5reset caller id receive number command 4-9reset dhcp address command 6-2reset directory number command 5-16reset filter command 8-3reset ip filter command 6-4reset ip pat porthandler command 6-6reset ip route command 6-5reset ipx fIlter command 7-4reset ipx gateway command 7-5reset ipx route command 7-6reset ipx sap helper command 7-7reset ipx service command 7-8reset packets command 2-12

reset pattern command 8-5reset phone command 5-18reset rcapi number command 13-7reset snmp trap command 10-2reset type command 8-6reset user command 3-2reset x25d policy command 12-7RFC-2091 6-53ring cadences 5-32ringback, set command 5-48RIP 1-2, 6-43

defined 6-1IP commands 6-1packets 7-17request 7-14set commands 6-44 to 6-55set ip rip receive command 6-44set ip rip snapshot client command 6-45set ip rip snapshot server command 6-48set ip rip summarization command 6-50set ip rip time command 6-51set ip rip update command 6-52set ip rip version command 6-55set ipx rip receive command 7-17set ipx rip snapshot client command 7-18set ipx rip snapshot server command 7-20set ipx rip update command 7-22show ip rip snapshot command 6-69show ip rip time command 6-71show ipx rip snapshot command 7-39supported protocol 1-2table 7-24table update 6-52triggered 6-52

routereset command 7-6set command 6-56, 7-24show command 6-72static 7-14summarization 6-50

router configuration load 2-54

Index 11

router manuals xvirouter security, configure 4-1routing 6-45, 6-48, 6-52, 7-20

set command 6-58Routing Information Protocol

See RIProuting table 6-53, 7-14

show ipx route 7-41, 7-43

S

SAPGet Nearest Server 7-27reset ipx sap helper command 7-7set ipx rip update command 7-22set ipx sap helper command 7-27table 7-27

SAP, supported protocol 1-1scope I 6-19screen length, set command 2-26second number fail-over 5-27secret

encrypted 9-1secret (password) 2-58security commands

login 4-2logout 4-4reset caller id receive 4-5set caller id 4-6set caller id receive number 4-9set clicallback 4-7set localaccess 4-10set logout 4-13set password 4-14set ppp authentication 9-5set ppp callback request/reply 9-14set ppp chaprefuse 9-17set ppp magicnumbercheck 9-21set ppp password 9-31


set remote access 4-17show security 4-20

security configurations 4-20, 4-21service

reset command 7-8set command 7-29show command 7-43

Service Advertisement Protocol 2-5See SAP

service profile identifierSee SPID

set active command 3-4set address command 8-7set age command 8-9set alawvoice command 5-21set aoctimeout command 5-19set aodi command 12-8set auto command 5-22set autodetection command 5-24set backup number command 5-27set baudrate command 2-13, 13-7set bridging command 8-10set button command 5-28set callduration command 2-15set caller id command 4-6set caller id receive number command 4-9set calltime command 2-16set callwaiting command 5-30set carrier wait time (TPAD) 2-28set clicallback command 4-7set compression command 2-18set conference command 5-31set countrygroup command 5-32set date command 2-19set default command 2-20set delay command 5-34set dhcp address 6-10set dhcp command 6-7set dhcp dns command 6-12set dhcp domain command 6-14set dhcp gateway command 6-15

erence

set dhcp leasetime command 6-17set dhcp netbios_scope 6-19set dhcp netmask command 6-20set dhcp wins commands 6-22set directory number command 5-16set directorynumber command 5-36set dtmf cancel call waiting 11-4set dtmf directory number command 11-5set dtmf disable dial terminator 11-1, 11-7set dtmf gateway command 11-8set dtmf ip address command 11-9set dtmf ip netmask command 11-10set dtmf number command 11-11set dtmf spid command 11-12set dtmf switch command 11-14set filter command 8-11set gateway command 6-24set inactive command 3-6set internaltones command 5-38set ip address command 6-25set ip cost command 6-26set ip filter command 6-27set ip framing command 6-32set ip multicast command 6-33set ip netmask command 6-36set ip pat command 6-37set ip pat porthandler command 6-38set ip pat tcptimeout command 6-41set ip pat udptimeout command 6-42set ip propagate command 6-43set ip rip snapshot client command 6-45set ip rip snapshot server command 6-48set ip rip summarization command 6-50set ip rip time command 6-51set ip rip update command 6-52set ip rip version command 6-55set ip route command 6-56set ip routing command 6-58set ipx filter command 7-10set ipx framing command 7-12set ipx gateway command 7-14

set ipx netbios command 7-15set ipx network address command 7-16set ipx rip receive command 7-17set ipx rip snapshot client command 7-18set ipx rip snapshot server command 7-20set ipx rip update command 7-22set ipx route command 7-24set ipx routing command 7-26set ipx sap helper command 7-27set ipx service command 7-29set ipx spoofing command 7-31set ipx trace command 2-23set learn command 8-13set link permanent command 5-42set localaccess command 4-10set logout command 4-13set loopback command 2-24set mode command 8-14set multidestination command 5-39set netbios name spoofing command 6-34set number command 5-11, 5-40set passthru command 8-16set password command 4-14set pattern command 8-17set phone command 5-44set plan command 5-46set ppp address negotiation command 9-3set ppp authentication accept command 9-8set ppp authentication command 9-5set ppp bacp command 9-10set ppp callback command 9-14set ppp chaprefuse command 9-17set ppp clientname command 9-19set ppp ip netmask local command 9-29set ppp magicnumbercheck command 9-21set ppp multilink command 9-23set ppp negotiation count command 9-25set ppp negotiation integrity command 9-26set ppp negotiation retry command 9-28set ppp password command 9-31set ppp tas chapsecret local command 9-35

Index 13

set ppp tas client command 9-36set ppp terminate count command 9-38set ppp termreq command 9-38set profile command 3-8set profile id command 3-10set rcapi command 13-8set rcapi number command 13-9set rcapi server port command 13-11set remote access command 4-17set ringback number command 5-48set screen length command 2-26set serialport command 2-27set snmp contact command 10-3set snmp location command 10-5set snmp trap command 10-7set snmp trap host command 10-10set speed command 5-50set spid command 5-52set subnet mask command 6-59set switch command 5-54set systemname command 2-30set telephone command 5-16set time command 2-32set timeout command 5-56, 9-12set transfer command 5-58set type command 8-20set unicast filtering command 8-22set user command 3-11set voicepriority mode command 5-59set x25d command 12-13set x25d policy command 12-15set x25d priorityqueue command 12-17set x25d priorityqueue lsvc limit command 12-21set x25d tei command 12-19set x25d x121host command 12-22show address command 8-23show aodi command 12-24show callduration command 2-37show calltime command 2-38show command 2-35show configuration command 2-39


show connection command 2-41show demand command 2-42show dhcp config command 6-60show ethernet command 8-25show filter command 8-26show ip conf command 6-53show ip configuration command 6-63show ip filter command 6-66show ip pat command 6-68show ip rip snapshot command 6-69show ip rip time command 6-71show ip route command 6-72show ipx configuration command 7-33show ipx connections command 7-35show ipx demand command 7-37show ipx filter command 7-38show ipx rip snapshot command 7-39show ipx route command 7-41show ipx service command 7-43show ipx statistics command 7-45show memstat command 2-43show negotiation command 9-39show netbios name command 6-74show packets command 2-45show pattern command 8-27show profile command 3-13show rcapi status command 13-12show security command 4-20show snmp command 10-11show status command 5-62show tpad command 2-47show type command 8-29show users command 2-48show voicerouting command 5-63show x25 command 12-25show x25d policy command 12-26show x25d priorityqueue command 12-27show x25d statistics command 12-29show x25d tei command 12-30show x25d x121host command 12-31

erence

Simple Mail Transfer ProtocolSee SMTP

Simple Network Management ProtocolSee SNMP commands

SMTP 6-38SNAP 7-12snapshot 6-69

server 6-48set ipx rip snapshot client command 7-18set ipx rip snapshot server command 7-20show ipx rip snapshot command 7-39

SNMP commandsreset snmp trap 10-2set snmp contact 10-3set snmp location 10-5set snmp trap 10-7set snmp trap host 10-10show snmp 10-11

SNMP, supported protocolsocket 7-29software

image file 2-49load command 2-49

tftp command 2-53troubleshooting 2-52

load time (table) 2-51software image 1-3software release level 2-59software, Cisco IOS-700 1-2SOHO 8-7speed, set command 5-50SPID 5-12, 5-14

DTMF directory number 11-5DTMF number 11-11establish command 5-12ID 5-36release command 5-14set autodetection command 5-24set command 5-52set dtmf spid command 11-12

SPIDs 5-1

analog voice calls 5-1associating a directory number 5-37associating with directory numbers 5-1number required for analog telephone port 5-2order of assignment 5-1

spoofing 6-35enable and disable 7-31set ipx spoofing command 7-31set netbios name spoofing command 6-34show netbios name command 6-74show netbios name spoofing command 6-74

SPX, IPX spoofing 7-31static address 8-7static IPX routes 7-6static IPX service routes 7-8static route 7-14statistics, show command 7-45status, show command 5-62subaddress 5-36, 5-40, 13-9

reset directory number command 5-16set directorynumber command 5-36

subnet mask 6-20, 6-59set ip netmask command 6-36set subnet mask command 6-59

subnetwork 7-12Subnetwork Access Protocol

See SNAPsupported protocols 1-1switch types

5ESS Custom 5-25AT&T 5ESS 5-54Australia 5-54Europe-ISDN BRI standard 5-54France-ISDN BRI standard 5-54Germany-ISDN BRI standard 5-54Japan-Dedicated line service 5-54Japan-NTT 5-54National ISDN-1 5-54Northern Telecom DMS-100 5-54

switch, set command 5-54switched virtual circuits 12-1, 12-9

Index 15

swl command 2-49syntax format 5-7, 5-10system

booting 2-1system commands

cd command 2-2help command 2-3log command 2-5ping command 2-9reboot command 2-11reset packets command 2-12set baudrate command 2-13, 13-7set callduration command 2-15set calltime command 2-16set compression command 2-18set date command 2-19set default command 2-20set ipx trace command 2-23set loopback command 2-24set screen length command 2-26set serialport command 2-27set systemname command 2-30set time 2-32show callduration command 2-37show calltime command 2-38show command 2-35show configuration command 2-39show connection command 2-41show demand command 2-42show memstat command 2-43show packets command 2-45show tpad command 2-47show users command 2-48software load (swl) command 2-49test command 2-55upload command 2-57version command 2-59

system interfaces 2-1system name 2-30system name, set command 2-30


system passwordremote access 4-15

T

TCP 6-27port assignment C-1port assignment, RCAPI 13-11set ip pat tcptimeout 6-41

TCP/IPheader compression 6-32relay function 12-13scope 6-19service C-1

TCP/IP TFTPdownload 2-49

tcptimeout, set command 6-41TEI 12-19telephone

interface 5-18, 5-30keypad 11-1LED 11-1service interface 11-1

Telnet C-1terminal

protocol 2-51TPAD 2-27

terminal emulation 2-50Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) 12-19Terminal Identifier Unassigned (TEU) 5-13terminal sessions 2-1terminate an ISDN call 5-10Terse mode (TPAD) 2-28test command 2-55test packets 2-55TEU 5-13TFTP 2-49

client 2-49file transfer 2-52

erence

server 2-49server mode 2-50swl command 2-49timeout interval 2-50upload tftp command 2-57

TFTP server 1-2threshold

demand 5-8time of day 2-16

set calltime command 2-16time of day limits 2-38time to live 6-33time, set command 2-32timeout command 5-64timeout interval 2-50timesaver, description xixtoken authentication client 9-35Token Authentication Support 9-33

set ppp tas client command 9-36tone dial (TPAD) 2-28TPAD 2-27 to 2-29, 2-33, 12-22

set serialport command 2-27show tpad command 2-47verbose mode 2-28

traceIPX 2-23

transaction queuing 12-4transfer, set command 5-58transparent bridging commands

reset address 8-2reset filter 8-3reset pattern 8-5reset type 8-6set address 8-7set age 8-9set bridge 8-10set filter 8-11set learn 8-13set mode 8-14set passthru 8-16set pattern 8-17

set type 8-20set unicast filtering 8-22show address 8-23show ethernet 8-25show filter 8-26show pattern 8-27show type 8-29

traphost 10-2reset snmp trap command 10-2set command 10-10set snmp trap command 10-7

trap host 10-8Triggered RIP 1-2triggered RIP 6-52Trivial File Transfer Protocol

See TFTPtype

reset command 8-6set command 8-20show command 8-29

typefield 8-17

U

UDPport assignments C-2set ip pat udptimeout command 6-42

unicastfiltering 8-21, 8-26packets 7-27

UNIX C-2unset command 3-14unset permanent command 5-66upload

command 2-57tftp 2-57

usage guidelineschannel 5-7

Index 17

connection 5-6link 5-7

USENET Network News Transfer Protocol C-2user

set command 3-11UUCP Path Service C-2

V

Variable Length Subnet Mask (VLSM) 6-50VBC 5-3Verbose mode (TPAD) 2-28version command 2-59version, set ip rip command 6-55virtual circuits 12-1VLSM 6-50Voice Bearer Capability (VBC) 5-50voice encoding, set alawvoice command 5-21voice priority 5-4

configuring the router for 5-4voice priority, set command 5-59voice routing, show command 5-63

W

WAN 6-52, 6-73, 7-22network 5-7, 5-11profile 6-53

Watchdog requests 7-31World Wide Web xvii

X

X.121host address 12-31set x25d x121host command 12-22


X.25 2-34bearer services 12-5fixed parameters 2-33over ISDN

description 12-1packet handler 12-9show x25d x121host command 12-31virtual circuits 12-1

X.25 commandsreset x25d policy command 12-7set ppp tas chapsecret local command 9-35set x25d command 12-13set x25d policy command 12-15set x25d priorityqueue command 12-17set x25d priorityqueue lsvc limit command 12-21set x25d tei command 12-19set x25d x121host command 12-22show x25 command 12-25show x25d policy command 12-26show x25d priorityqueue command 12-27show x25d statistics command 12-29show x25d tei command 12-30show x25d x121host command 12-31

erence

€¦ · contents iii contents about this manual xv related documentation xvi conventions xvii...

Documents